JP6342111B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a symbol in a manner that displays a result of a lottery after a symbol change display.

  Conventionally, when a random number used for a lottery is acquired because a game ball has entered (wins) a winning ball during symbol display, a display screen is displayed to indicate that the random number has been acquired and stored. The hold display is executed within. Here, the hold display indicates that images (hold images) corresponding to the number of random numbers stored in the display screen are displayed. For example, when two random numbers related to the first symbol (first special symbol) and three random numbers related to the second symbol (second special symbol) are stored, two reserved images related to the storage of the first symbol, This shows that three reserved images related to the storage of the second symbol are displayed. When the symbol variation display ends, the stored random number is consumed and a lottery is performed, and the symbol variation display is started according to the lottery result. When the random number is consumed, the hold display is also hidden in conjunction with it.

  For example, as an aspect of the hold display, the first hold display (first hold image) related to the first symbol is composed of contents that are continuously configured in stages, and the second hold display (second display related to the second symbol) There is a prior art of a gaming machine having a similar configuration with respect to (hold image) (see Patent Document 1). In this prior art, when a random number relating to the second symbol is stored again after the first hold display has been executed with a plurality of successive contents in advance, the contents at the same stage as the first hold display are stored. The second hold display is executed.

  In addition, there is a prior art of a gaming machine configured from a mode in which a first hold display related to the first symbol and a second hold display related to the second symbol can be distinguished as a hold display mode (see Patent Document 2). In this prior art, each hold image used for hold display is displayed in a distinguishable manner by making the hold images different.

JP 2010-136929 A JP 2010-200951 A

  Here, there is also one that uses animation as one of the display modes of the hold display. However, as in the prior art, the display mode of the hold display in which the hold display related to the storage of the first symbol and the hold display related to the storage of the second symbol are made to be the same image or a distinguishable image is applied to the animation. It was very difficult to control. In addition, when a random number stored at the time of a new symbol variation display is consumed, an effect that the hold display of the animation displayed so far is consumed is performed. It was very difficult. Therefore, since animation is executed independently, it is difficult to improve visibility and expression of animation.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of improving visibility and animation expression by executing animation in synchronization.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention employs the following solutions.
Solution 1: That is, according to the present invention, when a first lottery opportunity occurs during a game (a game ball enters the upper start winning opening and a winning occurs), a first lottery element necessary for executing a predetermined internal lottery When the first lottery element acquisition means for acquiring the second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity occurs during the game (the game ball enters the lower start winning opening and the winning occurs) A second lottery element that is a lottery element different from one lottery element and that acquires the second lottery element necessary for the execution of the internal lottery, and the first lottery element acquired by the first lottery element acquisition means First lottery element storage means for storing up to a predetermined upper limit number, second lottery element storage means for storing the second lottery element acquired by the second lottery element acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number, In the state where the starting condition is satisfied, the first lottery element storage means When the first lottery element is stored, or when the second lottery element is stored by the second lottery element storage means, either the first lottery element or the second lottery element is stored. The lottery execution means for consuming the lottery element and executing the internal lottery, and when the internal lottery is executed by consuming the first lottery element, the first symbol (first special symbol) is predetermined as a trigger The first symbol display means for stopping and displaying the first symbol in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery, and the internal lottery is executed by consuming the second lottery element. Then, after the second symbol different from the first symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time using this as a trigger, the second symbol display in which the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery. Means and said first In parallel with the variation display and stop display executed by the symbol display means or the variation display and stop display executed by the second symbol display means, the first lottery element by the first lottery element storage means A first stored number display effect executing means for executing a first stored number display effect in a mode of displaying the stored number of the first lottery element using a first stored display image that individually represents the presence of the memory, and The second lottery by the second lottery element storage means in parallel with the fluctuation display and stop display executed by the one symbol display means or the fluctuation display and stop display executed by the second symbol display means. A second memory number display effect executing means for executing a second memory number display effect in a mode of displaying the memory number of the second lottery element using a second memory display image that individually represents the presence of the memory of the element; First lot When the selection element is consumed and the internal lottery is executed, a first consumption effect representing that the first lottery element is consumed is executed for a predetermined time using the first stored display image, and the second When the lottery element is consumed and the internal lottery is executed, the consumption effect executing means for executing a second consumption effect indicating that the second lottery element is consumed using the second stored display image for a predetermined time. A plurality of types of the first storage display image used in the first memory number display effect or the first consumption effect, which are changed in stages from a first reference image as a reference to a first final image. The first memory display image defining means for prescribing one memory display image and the second memory display image used in the second memory number display effect or the second consumption effect are different from the first reference image. From the second reference image as the reference Execution of the first memory number display effect by the second memory display image defining means for preliminarily defining the plurality of types of the second memory display images that are changed in stages until the final image, and the first memory number display effect executing means. The first memory display image used for the first memory number display effect is stored in the first memory based on the degree of stepwise change of the first memory display image used last time for each predetermined image switching time. The first memory display image selecting means for selecting one of the plurality of types of the first memory display images defined by the display image defining means, and the second memory number display effect by the second memory number display effect executing means. During the execution of the second memory display image used for the second memory number display effect, based on the degree of stepwise change of the second memory display image used last time for each predetermined image switching time, Second memory display image During the execution of the first consumption effect by the second storage display image selection means for selecting one of the plurality of types of the second storage display images defined by the determining means, and the consumption effect execution means, the first The first storage display image used for the consumption effect is defined by the first storage display image defining means for each predetermined image switching time based on the degree of stepwise change of the first storage display image used last time. One of the plurality of types of the first stored display images is selected, and the second stored display image used for the second consumption effect is selected during execution of the second consumption effect by the consumption effect executing means. Based on the degree of stepwise change of the second storage display image used last time at every predetermined image switching time, a plurality of types of the second storage display images defined by the second storage display image defining means are stored. One from the inside When the consumption image selection means to be selected and the first memory number display effect and the second memory number display effect are executed in parallel, the first memory display image selection means and the second memory display image selection means Are selected at the same time, images having the same degree of change in stages are selected, and at least one of the first memory number display effect or the second memory number display effect and the consumption effect Are executed in parallel, at least one of the first storage display image selection means or the second storage display image selection means and the consumption image selection means select images at the same time in stages. An gaming machine comprising image synchronization means for selecting images having the same degree of change.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, before the lottery element memory is consumed by the lottery execution means, the presence or absence of the memory is taught by displaying a stored display image. Specifically, the first storage display image is individually displayed for the storage of the lottery elements regarding the first special symbol, and the second storage display image is individually displayed for the storage of the lottery elements regarding the second special symbol. . That is, when one lottery element is stored, one stored display image is displayed, and when four lottery elements are stored, four stored display images are displayed. In addition, these stored display images are composed of a series of images that change in a plurality of stages. When lottery elements are actually stored, the stored display images are changed to different stored display images every predetermined time. Therefore, the player can express the memory of the lottery element by animation display. In addition, when an animation related to the first special symbol (first memory number display effect) and an animation related to the second special symbol (second memory number display effect) are executed at the same time, the displayed memory display images are stepwise. Since images with the same degree of change are used, their animations can be synchronized. Therefore, individually synchronized animation display is executed for the memory of the first special symbol lottery element, individually synchronized animation display is executed for the memory of the second special symbol lottery element, and all the animation displays are synchronized. It represents that.

  Further, when the lottery element is consumed by the lottery execution means, an animation related to the consumption is executed. Specifically, when the memory of the lottery element of the first special symbol is consumed, an animation (first consumption effect) similar to the animation related to the storage of the lottery element of the first special symbol (first memory number display effect) ) Is executed and when the memory of the lottery element of the second special symbol is consumed, an animation (second consumption effect) similar to the animation related to the memory of the lottery element of the second special symbol (second memory number display effect) ) Is executed. In addition, if the animation related to the consumption of these special symbols and the animation related to the storage of the special symbol lottery elements are executed at the same time, the stored display images to be displayed are images having the same stepwise change. The animations can be synchronized.

  Therefore, the animation display about the consumption of the lottery element of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the animation display about each memory of the lottery element of the first special symbol, and the lottery element of the second special symbol All animation displays for each memory can be synchronized. Thus, visibility and animation expression can be improved by performing animation in synchronism rather than independently performing animation. Thereby, a great advantage in game play can be obtained.

  Solving means 2: In the solving means 1, the image synchronizing means performs the second storage by the second stored number display effect executing means during execution of the first stored number display effect by the first stored number display effect executing means. When the execution of the number display effect is started, the second storage display image selection unit performs control to select an image having the same degree of change as the image selected by the first storage display image selection unit in a stepwise manner. When execution of the first memory number display effect by the first memory number display effect executing means is started during execution of the second memory number display effect executing means by the second memory number display effect executing means, Control is performed to cause the first storage display image selection means to select an image having the same degree of change as the image selected by the storage display image selection means.

  In this case, either one of the special symbol lottery elements is stored and the animation (first memory number display effect or second memory number display effect) is executed, and the other special symbol lottery element is newly added. When stored, instead of newly executing an animation (second memory number display effect or first memory number display effect) from the beginning, an already executed animation (first memory number display effect or second memory number) A new animation (second memory number display effect or first memory number display effect) synchronized with the display effect) is executed. Therefore, since independent animation is not executed for each, and synchronized animation is executed, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to improve visibility and animation expression.

  Solving means 3: In the solving means 1 or 2, the image synchronizing means is configured to execute the first stored number display effect executing means during the execution of the first consumption effect or the second consumption effect by the consumption effect executing means. When execution of the one-memory-number display effect is started, control is performed to cause the first memory display image selection unit to select an image having the same degree of change as the image selected by the consumption image selection unit. When execution of the second stored number display effect by the second stored number display effect executing means is started during execution of the first consumption effect or the second consumed effect by the consumption effect executing means, the consumption image selection Control is performed to cause the second stored display image selection means to select an image having the same degree of change as the image selected by the means.

  In this case, the lottery element of the special symbol is consumed and the animation (the first consumption effect or the second consumption effect) is executed, and the lottery element of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is newly added. Is stored, the animation (first memory number display effect or second memory number display effect) is not newly executed from 1, but the animation being executed (first consumption effect or second consumption effect) is not executed. Another animation (first memory number display effect or second memory number display effect) is executed in synchronization. Therefore, since independent animation is not executed for each, and synchronized animation is executed, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to improve visibility and animation expression.

  Solving means 4: In the solving means 1 or 2, the first stored display image selecting means is the first stored number display effect by the first stored number display effect executing means and the second stored number display effect executing means. When the execution of the first memory number display effect by the first memory number display effect executing means is started in a state where the second memory number display effect by is not executed, the first reference image is selected, The second memory display image selecting means executes the first memory number display effect by the first memory number display effect executing means and the second memory number display effect by the second memory number display effect executing means. If execution of the second memory number display effect is started by the second memory number display effect executing means without being selected, the second reference image is selected.

  According to this solving means, when the animation (the first memory number display effect and the second memory number display effect) related to the storage of the lottery elements of both special symbols is not executed, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) When a lottery element (2 special symbols) is newly stored, the executed animation (first stored number display effect or second stored number display effect) starts from the first image (first reference image or second reference image). Be started. Therefore, since the animation is not started from the middle, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable and to improve the visibility and the expression of the animation.

  Solving means 5: In any one of the solving means 1 to 4, the first stored display image selecting means is configured such that when the first stored number display effect is executed by the first stored number display effect executing means, the previously selected image is displayed. If it is the first final image, the first reference image is selected, and the second stored display image selecting means is executing the second stored number display effect by the second stored number display effect executing means, When the image selected last time is the second final image, the second reference image is selected, and the consumption effect executing unit selects the previous time during execution of the first consumption effect by the first consumption effect executing unit. When the image that has been selected is the first final image, the first reference image is selected, and during the execution of the second consumption effect by the second consumption effect executing means, the previously selected image is the second final image. If there is, the second standard To select the image.

  According to this solution, when a series of animations ends, the animation is executed again by returning to the first image. That is, when the first final image or the second final image used in the animation is selected, the image selected next time becomes the first reference image or the second reference image. Therefore, the animation is repeatedly executed. In addition, when at least two animations are executed, since they are executed synchronously, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable and to improve visibility and animation expression. .

  Solving means 6: In any one of the solving means 1 to 5, the plurality of types of the first stored display images defined by the first stored display image defining means include the first reference image to the first final image. , A shape, a pattern, or a color, or an image that is changed stepwise by at least one image content of the combination thereof, and the plurality of types of the second storage display images defined by the second storage display image defining means are: The image obtained by changing the second reference image to the second final image stepwise with at least one image content of shape, pattern, color, or a combination thereof.

  According to this solution, as an image used in each animation (first memory number display effect, second memory number display effect, first consumption effect, or second consumption effect), a material pattern (shape, pattern or color or Of these combinations, at least one image content) is changed stepwise. For example, the image used in the animation related to the first special symbol (the first memory number display effect or the first consumption effect) may have a configuration in which the shape is changed by changing the angle at which the white coin is viewed, or the second special For use in animation related to symbols (second memory number display effect or second consumption effect), the shape can be changed by changing the angle at which the gray coin is viewed.

  Therefore, it is possible to easily tell the player that the lottery elements of special symbols are stored and that the lottery elements have been consumed.

  Solution 7: In any one of Solution 1 to 6, the number of types of images defined by the first stored display image defining unit and the second stored display image defining unit is the same.

  Therefore, it represents that the number of images used in each animation (first memory number display effect, second memory number display effect, first consumption effect, or second consumption effect) is the same. In this way, since the animation using the same number of images is executed, the animations can be easily synchronized. For example, when images are associated in numerical order, synchronization can be achieved by selecting images with the same number for each animation.

  Solving means 8: In any one of the solving means 1 to 7, the first reference image defined by the first stored display image defining means and the second reference image defined by the second stored display image defining means. Means that at least one of the shapes, patterns, colors, or combinations thereof is the same, and the first final image defined by the first stored display image defining means and the second stored display image defining means The second final image defined by is the same in at least one of the shape, pattern, color, or combination thereof.

  According to this solution, as an image used in each animation (first memory number display effect, second memory number display effect, first consumption effect, or second consumption effect), a material pattern (shape, pattern or color or The animation is made similar by making at least one image content of these combinations similar. For example, the animation relating to the first special symbol and the animation relating to the second special symbol can be made different between white and gray in terms of color, or different in shape from coins and rectangular parallelepipeds.

  Therefore, it is possible to tell the player in an easy-to-understand manner that lottery elements with different special symbols are stored and that lottery elements with different special symbols are consumed.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the hold display is an animation mode, each hold display related to storage of a plurality of first symbols, each hold display related to storage of a plurality of second symbols, and the memory are consumed. The display at the time of consumption can be synchronized, and visibility and animation expression can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the reach group selection table at the time of difference | error according to a state and the number of working memory. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern prefetch information command selection table. It is a figure which shows the reach classification corresponding table according to command. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure column of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big prize opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an end process. It is a continuation figure (1/2) which shows the example of the production image corresponding to the change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuation figure (2/2) which shows the example of the production picture made to correspond to the change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuation figure (1/3) which shows the example of the production picture made to respond to the change display and stop display of another special symbol. It is a continuation figure (2/3) which shows the example of the production picture made to respond to the change display and stop display of another special symbol. It is a continuation figure (3/3) which shows the example of the production image made to respond to the change display and stop display of another special symbol. It is a continuation figure which shows in part an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game. It is a continuation figure (1/3) which shows the example of the production picture corresponding to the change display and stop display of the special symbol in a time shortening state. It is a continuation figure (2/3) which shows the example of the production image matched with the change display and stop display of the special symbol in a time shortening state. It is a continuation figure (3/3) which shows the example of the production image matched with the change display and stop display of the special symbol in the time shortening state. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the effect control process performed by effect control CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation selection process at the time of a working memory number increase. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the correspondence table | surface of a marker material number and each special symbol marker. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation selection process at the time of a working memory number reduction. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a pending | holding marker effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a consumption marker effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a marker raw material number (the 1). It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a marker raw material number (the 2). It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production image matched with the change display and stop display of the special symbol of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the effect selection process at the time of the working memory increase of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the marker material number of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the correspondence table | surface of the marker material number and each special symbol marker of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the operation | movement memory production management process of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the pending | holding marker counter monitoring process of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the operation | movement memory production management process of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the consumption marker counter monitoring process of 5th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. The overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame assembly 2, a glass frame unit 4, a tray unit 6 and a plastic frame assembly 7 (game machine frame) as its main body. Among these, the outer frame assembly 2 is a structure in which wood is combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame assembly 2 uses fasteners such as screws for island facilities (not shown) in the game hall. Are fixed.

  The other glass frame unit 4, tray unit 6, and plastic frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame assembly 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the right edge (left edge in FIG. 2) of the plastic frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, the glass frame unit 4 and the right edge (back side) of the outer frame assembly 2 are each provided with a locking tool (not shown). As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame assembly 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of a game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates to open the glass frame unit 4 and the tray unit 6 together with the plastic frame assembly 7. It becomes a state. When these are entirely opened from the outer frame assembly 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the glass frame unit 4 is unlocked while the plastic frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the glass frame unit 4 can be opened. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened, the lock mechanism (not shown) of the tray unit 6 is exposed. If the lock mechanism is released in this state, the tray unit 6 can be opened to the front side with respect to the plastic frame assembly 7.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the plastic frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the glass frame unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the plastic frame assembly 7 with the glass frame unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The glass frame unit 4 has a vertically oval window 4a formed at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the glass frame unit 4 in an openable / closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the glass frame unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the game board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape projecting from the outer frame assembly 2 to the front side as a whole, and an upper dish 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at the lower position of the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separately received from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6b or lower pan 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine. In addition, when using the pachinko machine 1 as a cash machine, the lending operation unit 14 is not mounted.

  In addition, an upper dish ball removal lever 6d is installed on the front surface of the tray unit 6 in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal button 6e in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by sliding the upper plate ball removing lever 6d leftward, for example. Further, the player can, for example, push down the lower dish ball removal button 6e to drop the game balls stored in the lower dish 6c downward and discharge them. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6. The player operates the grip unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises along the left edge of the game board unit 8, and is guided into an outer band (not shown) and thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill.

[Configuration of the board]
In the game area 8a, a starting gate 20, normal winning ports 22, 24, an upper starting winning port 26, a variable starting winning device 28, a variable winning device 30, and the like are installed. The game balls thrown into the game area 8a randomly pass through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, or the normal winning ports 22, 24, the upper starting winning port 26, and the variable starting winning device during operation. Win 28 (enter a ball). The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the winning game balls are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board.

  The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner), and accordingly, the lower start winning port 28a can be awarded. (Ordinary electric appliance). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right movable pieces 28b, and these movable pieces 28b reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown in the figure, the left and right movable pieces 28b are in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, winning to the lower start winning opening 28a is impossible (a state in which there is no gap through which game balls can flow). ing. On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the left and right movable pieces 28b are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width of the lower start winning port 28a is expanded to the left and right. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which a game ball can flow in, and generates a win to the lower start winning port 28a. The arrangement (gauge) of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode in which it is easy to guide the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28, but the game ball is always The flow does not flow into the variable start winning device 28, but the flow is generated randomly.

  In addition, the above variable winning device 30 operates when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning), and can be awarded to a big winning opening (no reference sign). (Special electric equipment). The variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a, and this opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state or closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, winning in the big winning opening is always impossible (the big winning opening is closed). When the variable winning device 30 is operated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall forward with its lower end edge as a hinge, thereby opening the large winning opening (open state). During this time, the variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not impossible, and can generate an event of winning a prize winning opening. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball to the special winning opening.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, all game balls that have been driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls won in the upper start prize opening 26, the variable start prize device 28, and the variable prize device 30, are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. . The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  The game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, for example, at the lower right position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device. 35, a first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided (normal symbol display means, special symbol display means, lottery element storage means). Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs).

  FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower right position in the window 4a). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display the variation state and stop state of the special symbol by, for example, 7 segment LEDs (with dots), respectively (symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is changed to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing that a winning is generated each time a game ball flows into the upper start winning opening 26. (Up to a maximum of four), every time the change of the special symbol is started with the winning, the display mode is changed by one by one. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is displayed after being incremented by one in the sense of memorizing that a winning occurs every time a game ball flows into the variable starting winning device 28 (lower starting winning port). It changes to the mode (up to 4), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the winning as a trigger, it changes to the display mode after decreasing by one. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol is already in the upper start winning opening 26 in a state where the first special symbol can start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball flows in, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the variable start winning device 28 (lower start winning port) in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball flows in, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of winnings that have not yet started to change in the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Represents.

  The game state display device 38 includes four LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, a probability variation state display lamp 38c, and a short time state display lamp 38d. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol described above. The operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state where they are mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configuration of the game board: see FIG. 1]
The game board unit 8 is provided with an effect unit 40 from the center position to the right side. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inner side. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a stunning operation by emitting transmitted light from, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface (design of a cell plate (not shown)) and the decoration of the effect unit 40. When a transparent board (for example, an acrylic board) is used for the game board unit 8 instead of a veneer board, decorativeness by various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) disposed on the front and back of the transparent board is added. The

  A ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40f is formed at the center of the rolling stage 40e. At this time, the game ball that has flowed down from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40f easily flows into the upper start winning opening 26 directly below the ball discharge path 40f. Become.

  In addition, the decoration unit 400 is attached to the effect unit 40 as a movable body for the effect. The decorative body 400 is a decorative part shaped like a heart shape, for example, and is stored in the effect unit 40 at a position above the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in the state shown in FIG. The decoration body 400 is lowered from the position stored in the effect unit 40 by the action of a decoration body motor, a link mechanism, and the like not shown in FIG. 1, and the whole moves to a position before the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. can do. Further, the decorative body 400 is provided with a decorative body lamp not shown in FIG. 1, and the decorative body 400 can perform a light emission effect by turning on and blinking the decorative body lamp. Such a decorative body 400 executes an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Such an effect using the decorative body 400 can have an impact different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
In the glass frame unit 4, glass frame top lamps 46 and 48 and glass frame side lamps 50 are installed at a plurality of locations so as to surround the glass unit 8 as components for production. In addition, a tray lamp 52 is installed in the tray unit 6, and the tray lamp 52, the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, and the glass frame side lamp 50 are integrally connected on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 in appearance. Designed as if it were.

  The various lamps 46 to 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like) of built-in LEDs. In addition, a pair of left and right glass frame speakers 54 and a glass frame middle speaker 55 are built in the upper part of the glass frame unit 4, and a saucer speaker 56 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 6 c in the saucer unit 6. Built in. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (individual information receiving means) is provided at a position in front of the upper tray 6b. The player operates the effect switching button 45 to switch the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, during the big hit confirmation display, or during the big hit game It is possible to generate some effects (various notice effects, probable promotion effects, etc.).

  Further, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (individual information receiving means). A player can input individual information such as a password through an operation menu displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 42, for example, by rotating the jog dial 45a. Alternatively, when the player is requested to rotate the jog dial 45a for the effect during the game, the player can actually respond to the request for the effect by rotating the jog dial 45a.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. The electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 4).

  The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference sign), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the plastic frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is an interface for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). From the external terminal board 160, the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved. Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. Yes.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (RWM) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). ) This is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as 76 are integrated. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for determining the big hit, and the generated random number is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. The In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with an upper start winning port switch 80, a lower start winning port switch 82 and a count switch 84 corresponding to the upper start winning port 26, the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. Yes. Each start winning port switch 80, 82 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the upper start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (lower start winning port 28a). The count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 30 (large winning opening) and counting the number. Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning port switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the normal winning ports 22 and 24. Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is given as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, a winning of a game ball for the normal winning ports 22, 24 located on the left side of the board surface is detected, and in the right winning port switch 86, a winning of a game ball in the normal winning port 24 located on the right side of the board surface is detected. Also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the count switch 84 and the winning opening switch 86 are transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 87, and are sent to the panel relay terminal plate 87. Are provided with wiring patterns and connection terminals for relaying the respective winning detection signals.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a big prize opening solenoid 90 corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. These solenoids 88 and 90 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 to open and close (activate) the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 respectively. The solenoids 88 and 90 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and when the plastic frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame assembly 2. The contact point signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 or the plastic frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door opening information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is equipped (special privilege grant means). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. When the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the firing control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Moreover, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8 as described above. The game ball is emitted at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. . In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). The lending / return switch board 123 has switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12, respectively. When the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended and It is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 120. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. If no valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display device to display a demonstration (of the valuable medium). (Display for prompting input) can also be performed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp driving circuit 132 and an acoustic driving circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or a process of actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. Note that the communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. The various lamps include a board lamp 53 for decoration and performance installed in the game board unit 8 in addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the tray lamp 52. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, or the like. Here, although the example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given, a saucer illuminated board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is interposed via the saucer illuminated board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output.

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame decoration board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame decoration board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Further, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Is done. Further, the jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136. When the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. In addition, although the example which connected the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the glass frame decor substrate 136 is given here, when the above-described saucer decor board is installed, the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a are the saucer decor. It may be connected to the substrate.

  In addition, the panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 via the panel board 138. In addition, the decorative body motor 402 and the decorative body lamp 404 are connected to the effect control device 124 (effect control CPU 126) via the panel electric decoration board 138. As described above, the decorative body motor 402 can move the decorative body 400 up and down via a link mechanism or the like (not shown). Further, the decorative body lamp 404 can cause the decorative body 400 to emit light in a decorative manner, for example, by light emission of an LED.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen through the substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8 is visible. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and production control by image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time) on the VRAM 156, and individually handles each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data. To drive.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 164 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  5 and 6 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: The main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the occurrence of the previous power interruption.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special symbol-specific prefetch information command, a variation pattern prefetch information command, an increase in the number of working memories. A production command, a production command when the number of working memories decreases, a remaining count counter command, a special game state designation command, etc.) are transmitted. In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. The main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 6 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the big prize opening solenoid 90, etc., and the entire area excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76. Is backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, various random numbers excluding jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) (for example, hit determined random numbers corresponding to ordinary symbols, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach group determined random numbers, reach mode determined random numbers, variation pattern determined random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range by another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 8). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 8), and therefore overlap (conflict) ) To prevent the above). As described above, in this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a hardware random number generated by the random number generator 75, and its update cycle is faster (eg, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (eg, several ms). Therefore, it is not necessary to update the initial value of the jackpot determination random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 8). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: The main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 5).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, normal symbol random numbers determined, and the like.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, an input state (ON / OFF) of a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and a winning detection signal from the upper starting winning port switch 80, the lower starting winning port switch 82, the count switch 84, and the winning port switch 86. Lead.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the upper start winning opening switch 80, and the lower starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the upper start winning opening switch 80 or the lower starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. When the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. The processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the upper start winning port switch 80 or the lower starting winning port switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. (2) The variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is controlled according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To do. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction command for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls is issued. Output.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display device) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is output. Can provide various jackpot information (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently jackpot. Or for each table, it can be recognized whether or not the current symbol variation time is in a shortened state. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: The main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs the drive signals, test signals, and the like of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special prize opening solenoid 90 stored in the port output request buffer together.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processings are executed by being incorporated in the main loop of the CPU. There is also a programming example.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 8). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the upper start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol (the first event is generated). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (second event occurs) from the lower start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 corresponding to the big winning opening. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes a large winning mouth count process. In the big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 30 every round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operating memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 8).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 9). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each section contains a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol random number. Each can be stored as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 9). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 8).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of lottery elements, element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: The main control CPU 72 sequentially obtains a reach group determination random number, a reach mode determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number from the random number counter area for variation in the RAM 76 as random number values related to the variation condition of the first special symbol ( Fluctuation pattern determination element acquisition, element storage acquisition means). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. When the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot decision random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach group decision random number, reach mode decision random number and variation pattern decision random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers. Are stored as a set in a free section in the area (processing as element storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following step S37. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S37 and proceeds to step S38. This determination is made in the present embodiment because basically the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit, but the operation memory generated during the big hit may be the target of the pre-reading notice effect.

  Step S37: When the current game management state (internal state) is other than the big hit (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 and S33, and also acquired in step S34. By determining the variation pattern information in advance based on the random numbers for variation, the content of the effect is determined in advance (so-called “prefetching”). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various prefetch information commands. The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories for the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BAH”) representing the command type, the number of working memories after the increase (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte to be a one-word length A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BAH” is a value indicating that the current production command is an operation memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This processing includes the effect command at the time of special figure destination determination generated at the previous step S37 (special figure-specific pre-read information command, variation pattern pre-read information command), the effect command at the time of increase of the working memory generated at step S38, and the start port. This is for transmitting a winning sound control command or the like to the effect control device 124 (memory number notifying means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 9).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 9). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 9). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 10), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 8) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of lottery elements, element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 10) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 10) described above.

  Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (the variation pattern determination element). Acquisition, element acquisition means). The acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 10) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot decision random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach group decision random number, reach mode decision random number and variation pattern decision random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers. Are stored as a set in a free section in the area (processing as element storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 10) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following step S46. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S46 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process also determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the second special symbol jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number obtained in the previous steps S42 and S43, and in step S44. By determining the variation pattern information in advance based on the acquired variation random numbers, the content of the effect is determined in advance. Here again, the main control CPU 72 generates various prefetch information commands. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S48: After returning from the acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the number of working memories after the increase (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the command type Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is an operation memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, with respect to the second special symbol, an effect control device such as an effect command at the time of determination of the special symbol destination (special symbol-specific pre-reading information command, variation pattern pre-reading information command), an effect command when the number of operating memories increases, a start opening winning sound control command, etc. 24 is prepared for transmission (memory number notifying means). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 9).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 10 and step S46 in FIG. 11) (preliminary determination). means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when winning the upper start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when winning the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: First, the main control CPU 72 loads a jackpot determination random number as a random number value for the previous determination. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 10) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 11). .

  Step S52: The main control CPU 72 executes a hit confirmation process using the loaded random number. Here, a range of hit values is set for each probability state (low probability state or high probability state), and it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot determination random number is within the range of hit values. When the winning is confirmed here, the main control CPU 72 sets the winning offset (for example, “1”) as a return value. On the other hand, if the winning is not confirmed, the main control CPU 72 sets a non-winning offset (for example, “0”) as a return value. The “offset for winning” and “offset for non-winning” are values indicating whether the determination result of the winning confirmation process (step S52) is “winning” or “non-winning”.

  Step S54: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number as the random number value for the first determination. The random number to be loaded here is the big hit symbol for each symbol stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 10) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 11). It is a random number.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 executes symbol confirmation processing. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) for each of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number paired with the jackpot determined random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 10) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 11). Then, a comparison is made with the comparison value stored in the symbol type determination table (not shown in particular), and from the result, whether the jackpot type corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol” or “probable symbol” Further, it is determined whether the symbol corresponds to “7-round symbol” or “16-round symbol”. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the symbol confirmation offset to a return value based on the determination result. The above processing is performed when the winning offset is set as a return value in the hit confirmation processing in step S52. When the main control CPU 72 sets the non-winning offset in step S52 as a return value, in the current symbol confirmation process, for example, a non-winning symbol confirmation offset can be set as a return value. The “symbol confirmation offset” used here is a value representing “what the winning symbol corresponds to” or “not applicable to the winning symbol (non-winning)” as the determination result performed in the symbol confirmation process (step S56). is there.

  Step S57: The main control CPU 72 generates a special symbol-specific symbol prefetch information command based on the symbol confirmation offset which is a return value. This command represents the result of pre-reading “out of symbol” or “hit symbol type” for each of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol-specific symbol prefetch information command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8).

  Step S58: After executing the procedure so far, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the previous determination result in the hit confirmation process (step S52) is true. This confirmation can be performed using the symbol confirmation offset of the return value set immediately before. In other words, if the symbol confirmation offset is a value representing “out-of-order symbol” (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S60, and conversely if the symbol confirmation offset is a value representing any “big hit symbol type” ( Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S68. In either case, the main control CPU 72 generates a prefetch information command related to the variation pattern in the subsequent procedure. First, the procedure at the time of disconnection will be described.

[Procedure for generating a change pattern prefetch information command at the time of loss]
Step S60: The main control CPU 72 sets a reach group selection table for each state and each number of working memories. The reach group selection table is a table for performing random drawing of the variation pattern using the reach group determination random number among the three random numbers (reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number) related to the determination of the variation pattern. is there. A configuration example of the reach group selection table will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S62: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the stored reach group determination random number from the RAM 76.
Step S64: The main control CPU 72 executes the first variation pattern determination process. In this process, as described above, the variation pattern category lottery (reach type lottery) is performed using the reach group determination random number, and the selected offset is set as a return value. The details of the specific process will be described later together with a configuration example of the reach group selection table.

  Step S66: The main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern prefetch information command using the selected offset value. The command generated here is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8).

[Procedure for generating variation pattern look-ahead information command for hits]
The above procedure is a procedure when the result of the pre-reading hit confirmation is out of place, but when the hit is confirmed by pre-reading (step S58: Yes), a variation pattern pre-reading information command is generated by the following procedure.

  Step S68: In this case, the main control CPU 72 selects an offset that has been fixed in advance for hitting, and sets this as a return value. Therefore, it is not particularly necessary to perform category lottery here.

  Step S66: The main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern prefetch information command fixed in advance using the selected fixed offset value for hitting time. In this way, since the offset is always fixed at the time of hitting, the variation pattern prefetch information command can be of one type. The command generated here is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8). The “fixed offset for hitting time” is a value indicating that the determination result of the previous hit checking process (step S52) was “winning”.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 10) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11).

[Reach group selection table by state and working memory count]
FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the reach group selection table at the time of divergence by state and number of working memories. In the ROM 76 of the main control CPU 72, for example, a plurality of selection tables are stored in advance for each internal state and each operation memory number. In step S60 of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 stores the current internal state and operation memory. Set the reach group selection table that suits the number of conditions. The internal state condition includes, for example, a low probability non-short state, a low probability short state, a high probability non-short state, or a high probability short state, and the working memory number condition includes, for example, the first special symbol. Or, there is a distinction of 0 to 1, 2, 3, etc. for each second special symbol, or a distinction of 0-4, 5, 6, 7, etc. as the total working memory number of both. Note that the table shown in FIG. 13 assumes a normal state (low probability non-short state) and 0 to 1 working memories.

  13 is a structure in which, for example, a “comparison value” and an “offset value” are set and stored in units of 1 byte in order from the head address. Here, the “comparison value” includes eight different values “124”, “174”, “374”, “546”, “616”, “761”, “961”, “999 (0FFFH), for example. ”And reach mode selection offsets“ 06 ”,“ 10 ”,“ 02 ”,“ 06 ”,“ 10 ”,“ 02 ”,“ offset values ”for each“ comparison value ”, “11” and “12” are assigned.

  The main control CPU 72 compares the loaded reach group determined random numbers with the above “comparison value” in order, and if the random number value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, selects the offset value corresponding to the comparison value. For example, if the reach group determination random number at that time is “190”, the value of the random number exceeds the comparison value compared to the first comparison value “124”, so the main control CPU 72 determines the next comparison value “ 174 "and the value of the random number are compared. Again, since the value of the random number exceeds the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 further compares the value of the random number with the next comparison value “374”. In this case, since the value of the random number is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects the corresponding reach mode selection offset “02”. Alternatively, if the reach group determination random number is “979”, the main control CPU 72 has compared to the third comparison value “961” from the bottom, and then exceeded the next comparison value “961”. The reach mode selection offset “12” corresponding to the comparison value “999 (0FFFH)” is selected.

  The offset value selected here specifies the conditions for selection of the variation pattern table for each reach mode using the reach mode determination random number in the next stage in the actual variation start processing (displacement variation pattern determination processing). is there. In the actual processing, the variation pattern determination lottery using the variation pattern determination random number at the final stage is specified through the reach mode variation pattern table selection lottery. In the actual processing, the variation pattern number is selected at the actual variation start (at the variation) from the result of the variation pattern determination lottery at the final stage.

  In addition, in the effect determination process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 12) of this embodiment, the lower byte (EVENT value) of the variation pattern prefetch information command is set only by the reach mode selection offset obtained in the initial selection lottery. Yes. In other words, at the start of actual variation, the final variation pattern number is uniquely determined using all of the reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number and variation pattern determination random number obtained at the time of winning a prize. In the form of “look-ahead”, there is a unique advantage in that the variation pattern look-ahead information command is determined using only the reach group determination random number. More specific description will be given below.

[Change pattern look-ahead information command selection table]
FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation pattern prefetch information command selection table. (A) in FIG. 14 shows a table applied when the result of prefetching is out of sync, and (B) in FIG. 14 shows a table applied when the result of prefetching is hit.

[Change pattern look-ahead information command at the time of loss]
14A: The left column in the table indicates the reach mode selection offsets “00” to “12” selected using the reach group determined random numbers. The two columns on the right side of the table indicate the values of the variation pattern prefetch information command corresponding to each offset value. Among these, the central column indicates the common “BEH” that is the upper byte (MODE value) of the command, and the rightmost column indicates the lower byte (EVENT value) of the command. That is, the change pattern prefetch information command is described in a word format in which the upper byte is the MODE value (common “BEH”) and the EVENT value (undefined value) of the lower byte is combined therewith.

  If the value of the reach mode selection offset is either “00” or “01” as shown in the upper two rows excluding the heading row in the table (the same applies thereafter), the corresponding variation pattern prefetching is performed. The lower byte of the information command is “00H”. If the value of the reach mode selection offset is any one of “02” to “04”, the lower byte of the corresponding variation pattern prefetch information command is “02H”. Similarly, for each of the reach mode selection offset values “05” to “12”, the lower byte of the corresponding variation pattern prefetch information command is “00H”, “01H”, “03H”, “04H”. Either one is selected.

[Hit fluctuation pattern look-ahead information command]
In FIG. 14, (B): The variation pattern prefetch information command at the time of hitting is fixed as described above. That is, when the winning effect is determined in the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 12), the main control CPU 72 selects “99” as the fixed reach mode selection offset for winning time (step S68 in FIG. 12). In this case, the lower byte of the corresponding variation pattern prefetch information command in the table is always fixed and is “7EH”. The upper byte is common to “BEH”.

[Reach type correspondence table by command]
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a reach type correspondence table for each command. This correspondence table indicates the reach type (variation pattern information) corresponding to the variation pattern prefetch information command generated in the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 12).

  The left two columns in the table indicate “BEH00H” to “BEH04H” and “BEH7EH (fixed value)” of the variation pattern prefetch information commands. The right column in the table indicates the reach type corresponding to each command.

[Reach type]
Here, “non-reach”, “normal reach”, “weak super reach”, “strong super reach”, and “story reach” of the reach types shown in the table of FIG. 15 collectively refer to the following categories, respectively. It shall be.

(1) “Non-reach”
“Non-reach” as the reach type means that a variation pattern (usually a shift variation pattern) that does not perform reach variation with the variation is selected. In this case, the variation pattern selected in the actual process (the variation pattern determination process at the time of loss) is always “non-reach”, and a relatively short variation time (for example, about 2 to 13 seconds) is selected. .

(2) “Normal reach system”
“Normal reach system” as the reach type means that a reach variation is performed in the variation, but a variation pattern designating a variation effect pattern belonging to “normal reach” is selected in the effect control. In this case, the variation pattern selected in the actual process (the variation pattern determination process at the time of loss) is always “reach variation”, but a relatively short variation time (for example, about 20 to 30 seconds) is selected. It will be.

(3) "Weak super reach system"
“Weak super reach system” as the reach type means that a change pattern is selected that performs a reach change by the change and specifies a change production pattern belonging to “weak super reach” in the production control. Yes. In this case as well, the variation pattern selected in the actual process (the variation pattern determination process at the time of loss) is always the “reach variation”, and a relatively medium variation time (for example, about 50 to 60 seconds). ) Will be selected.

(4) “Strong super reach system”
“Strong super reach system” as the reach type means that a variation pattern that specifies a variation effect pattern belonging to “strong super reach” on the effect control is selected while performing the reach variation with the variation. Yes. In this case as well, the variation pattern selected in the actual process (the variation pattern determination process at the time of loss) is always “reach variation”, and a relatively long variation time (for example, about 100 seconds to 120 seconds) is selected. Will be.

(5) "Story reach system"
“Story reach type” as the reach type means that a change in reach is performed based on the change, and a change pattern that specifies a change effect pattern belonging to “story reach” is selected in the effect control. In this case, the variation pattern selected in the actual process (the variation pattern determination process at the time of disconnection) is always “reach variation”, and among these, the variation time (for example, 150 seconds to About 200 seconds) is selected.

(6) “Fluctuation per hit”
Note that “win fluctuation” as the reach type means that win fluctuation is performed by the fluctuation. In this case, the variation pattern selected in the actual processing (big hit hour variation pattern determination processing) is “big hit hour reach variation”. In addition, since the result of “winning” is more important than what kind of production is designated at the time of winning, only a simple result of “winning fluctuation” is transmitted to the production control device 124. Yes.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the prefetch information command is generated using only the reach group determination random number among the various random numbers for variation in the acquisition stage effect determination process (FIG. 12), and this is sent to the stage control device 124. Sending. In this case, the transmitted variation pattern prefetch information command does not completely specify the unique variation pattern number (specific total variation time) selected by the variation, but the variation is “non-reach” or It can be seen that basic information indicating which one is “reach”, and in the case of “reach”, type information indicating which reach type is clearly indicated. In addition, when the previous determination result is a win, it clearly indicates “win fluctuation”. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently execute the pre-determination effect using the above-described variation pattern prefetch information command in the effect control process by the effect control device 124 while reducing the processing load of the main control CPU 72.

  Further, if the previous determination result is a win, it is a fixed command and the subsequent processing is omitted. Thereby, the processing load by the main control CPU 72 can be further reduced. In addition, since a fixed command representing “hit fluctuation” is transmitted at the time of hitting, it is possible to execute a predetermination effect corresponding to the hitting time correctly in effect control. Details of the effect control process will be described later.

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 8) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a variable winning device management process. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of (Step S5000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode (a mode other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a 16-round big hit mode, an opportunity to shift from a normal state until then to a big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until nine winnings are counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, 7 times, 16 times), As a result, the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In the meantime, by allowing the variable winning device 30 to win the game balls intensively, the player is given an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game execution means). Note that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of the big win is referred to as “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 16 times, these may be collectively referred to as “16 rounds”. The round operation of the variable winning device 30 is that a predetermined opening time (for example, about 29 seconds) elapses in the open state, or a prescribed number of winnings (for example, winning of eight game balls) occurs during the opening. Then, it returns to the closed state and ends. In the present embodiment, not only 16 round big hits but also multiple types of 7 round big hits are provided as the types of big hits. In addition, for the 16 round big hit and the 7 round big hit, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided therein.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 for one round. Each time it is finished, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). In the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended. As a result, the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for the above-mentioned “16 round jackpot”, for example, (1) “16 round probability variable jackpot” and (2) “16 round normal (non-probability) jackpot” are provided as a plurality of winning types (this) There may be more). In addition to “16 round big hits”, in this embodiment, (3) “7 rounds probable big hits” and (4) “7 round normal (non-probable big hits)” are provided as a plurality of winning types (more than this May be).

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “16 round probability variation jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol”, and “16 round normal jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round regular symbol”. “7 round probability variation big hit” corresponds to the big hit of “7 round probability variation big deal”, and “7 round normal big hit” corresponds to the big hit of “7 round normal variation big hit”. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[16 rounds of normal symbols (usually winning types)]
First, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “16 round normal symbol” mode in the special symbol stop display processing described above, an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game execution). means). In this case, the special winning opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the 16th round. For this reason, the “16-round normal symbol” jackpot game gives 16 rounds of award (prize balls) to the player. Note that when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the special winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. In this case, since the “probability changing function” is not activated, the privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is not given to the player. However, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the end of the big hit game, there is a privilege to shift to the “variable time reduction state”. It is given to the player.

[16 round probability variation (specific winning types)]
Alternatively, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “16 round probability variation symbol” mode in the previous special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the special winning opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the 16th round. Each of these “16-round probable symbols” jackpot games also gives the player 16 balls (prize balls) for 16 rounds. Further, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the big winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the big hit game is finished, the “variable time reduction state” is also achieved. A privilege to be transferred is given to the player.

[7 round normal design]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “7 round normal symbol”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). . In this case, the winning opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the seventh round. For this reason, in the “7 round normal symbol” jackpot game, 7 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. Note that when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the special winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. In this case, since the “probability changing function” is not activated, the privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is not given to the player. In addition, regarding the “seven round normal symbol”, even after the end of the big hit game, the “time reduction function” is not activated, and the privilege to shift to the “variable time reduction state” is not given to the player.

[7 rounds probable design]
Alternatively, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “7 round probability variation symbol” in the previous special symbol stop display processing, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the winning opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the seventh round. Each of these “7-round probable symbols” jackpot games also gives the player 7 balls (prize balls) for 7 rounds. Further, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the big winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. In addition, regarding the “7-round probabilistic symbols”, the player may be given a privilege to activate the “time reduction function” after the jackpot game ends and shift to the “variable time reduction state”. There may be a case where the “time reduction function” is not activated later and the transition to the “variable time reduction state” is not made. Details of these distributions will be described later.

  In any case, if the winning symbol falls under either of the above “16-round probability variation symbol” or “7-round probability variation symbol”, the player is given a privilege to shift the internal state to the “high probability state” after the big hit game ends. Is granted. In addition, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and the winning symbol at that time corresponds to either “16 round probability variation symbol” or “7 round probability variation symbol”, the “high probability state” will be maintained even after the jackpot game ends. Is continued (resumed). On the other hand, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and falls into either of the above “16 round normal symbol” or “7 round normal symbol”, the internal state will be the normal probability state (low probability state) after the big hit game ends. Return to). Needless to say, if the internal lottery is won in the normal probability state and falls into either “16 round normal symbol” or “7 round normal symbol”, the internal state is maintained in the normal probability state even after the big hit game ends.

[Small hits]
In the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small winning game, a small winning game is performed separately from the big winning game, and the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed. That is, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit state in the previous special symbol stop display processing, the game (variable winning a prize) in the normal probability state or the high probability state. A game in which the device 30 operates) is executed. In such a small win game, the variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but hardly wins a big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability change function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so it goes to the “high probability state” or “time reduction state”. The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the game of that small hit, and even if you win a small hit in the “time reduction state” The “time reduction state” does not end after the end of the small hit game (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and after the subtraction Is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 8). . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. That is, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the variable winning device 30 as in the case of “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the central bar). It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the “−”) lighting display. In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved. Alternatively, when the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 are arranged in the form of a plurality of dot LEDs, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of detachment may be a lighting display of one specific dot LED. .

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time shortening state”, except for the case where reach variation is basically performed, the variation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (shortening variation time determination means). Even if the state is not “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is, for example, the “variable display start operation memory number (for example, 0 to 3 or the total operation) set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. The number may be shortened based on “0-4, 5, 6, 7, etc.”. Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time (the number of variation seconds at the time of disconnection) in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. Reach production includes reach production classified as “normal reach” as described above, reach production classified as “weak super reach” or “strong super reach”, and “story reach”. Various reach effects such as reach effects classified into

[Change pattern determination process at the time of loss]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the above-described variation pattern determination process at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S2450: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a reach group selection table for each state and each number of working memories. This content is the same as the above-described acquisition effect determination process (step S60 in FIG. 12). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 sets the reach group selection table corresponding to the current conditions according to the internal state and the number of operating memories.

  Step S2452: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the reach group determination random number among the various random numbers for variation shifted in the previous special symbol storage area shift process (step S2200 in FIG. 17). The target to be loaded here has the same value as the effect determination process at the time of acquisition (step S62 in FIG. 12).

  Step S2454: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the first fluctuation pattern determination process. In this process, a variation pattern category lottery (reach type lottery) is performed using the loaded reach group determination random number, and the selected offset is set as a return value. The content of the process here is the same as the above-described acquisition effect determination process (step S64 in FIG. 12), and the detachment reach group selection table (FIG. 13) similar to the above is used for the category lottery. Accordingly, the reach mode selection offset is set to the return value here.

  Step S2456: The main control CPU 72 sets a reach mode selection table using the reach mode selection offset which is the previous return value. The procedure from here is different from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 12). The reach mode selection table set here is used for selection lottery using the reach mode determination random number as an argument in the next stage.

Step S2458: In order to perform the selection lottery, the main control CPU 72 loads a reach mode determination random number.
Step S2460: The main control CPU 72 executes the second variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects a corresponding variable mode offset from the reach mode selection table based on the reach mode determination random number, and sets the result as a return value. The variation mode offset selected here designates the address of the variation pattern selection table used in the final variation pattern determination lottery.

  Step S2462: Therefore, next, the main control CPU 72 sets the variation pattern selection table using the variation mode offset which is a return value. Specifically, the table address indicated by the value of the variation mode offset is designated on the ROM 74 as described above.

Step S2464: When the table address is designated, the main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern determination random number which is the last random number.
Step S2466: The main control CPU 72 executes the third variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects a corresponding variation pattern number from the variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern determination random number. The main control CPU 72 sets the selected variation pattern number as a return value. The variation pattern number selected here is the unique variation pattern that is finally performed in the variation (variation mode from the start of the change to the occurrence of the notice, the time from the start of the tempe, the reach mode, the reach variation time, and the final stop display. ), And the total fluctuation time (fluctuation seconds) in the fluctuation is uniquely determined from the fluctuation pattern number.

  Step S2468: Finally, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern command from the variation pattern number selected as the return value. The generated variation pattern command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8). Then, the effect control device 124 can grasp the change pattern information of the change from the received change pattern command or select the change effect pattern.

[Configuration example of variation pattern selection table]
FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation pattern selection table. Note that (A) to (K) in FIG. 19 show the tables specified by the variable mode offset values “00” to “10” separately for each address. In each table, the range of the variation pattern determination random number is shown in the left column, and the variation pattern number corresponding to the right column is shown.

  For example, when the main control CPU 72 has set the variation mode offset “00” as the return value, in the third variation pattern determination process, the main control CPU 72 designates the table address shown in FIG. In this case, the main control CPU 72 selects “special 0” as the variation pattern number regardless of the variation pattern determination random number between 0 and 250.

  If the main control CPU 72 has set the fluctuation mode offset “01” as a return value, the main control CPU 72 designates the table address shown in FIG. 19B in the third fluctuation pattern determination process. In this case, the main control CPU 72 selects “special 1” as the variation pattern number regardless of the variation pattern determination random number between 0 and 250.

  Next, when the main control CPU 72 has set the fluctuation mode offset “02” as a return value, the main control CPU 72 designates the table address shown in FIG. At this time, if the variation pattern determination random number is within the range of 0 to 200, the main control CPU 72 selects “special 2” as the variation pattern number, but the variation pattern determination random number is 201 or more (within 250). If there is, the main control CPU 72 selects “Special 4” as the variation pattern number.

  In the same manner, the main control CPU 72 sets the return values for the variable mode offsets “03”, “04”, “05”, “06”, “07”, “08”, “09”, “10”, respectively. The table addresses shown in (D), (E), (F), (G), (H), (I), (J), and (K) in FIG. The main control CPU 72 can select a variation pattern number corresponding to the value of the variation pattern determination random number in each table.

  When the procedure of the variation pattern determination process (FIG. 18) is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol fluctuation pre-process (FIG. 17). After returning, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to a special symbol fluctuation pre-process (step S2415 in FIG. 17).

[Refer to Fig. 17: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Here, step S2404 and step S2405, which are executed before the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2415), are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case of non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step In the case of S2400: Yes) or small hit (step S2402: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determining means, first symbol winning type determining means, second symbol winning type determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining unit, first symbol winning type defining unit, second symbol winning type defining unit). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, there are roughly 10 types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The 10 types are: “7 Round Normal Symbol 1”, “7 Round Normal Symbol 2”, “7 Round Normal Symbol 3”, “16 Round Normal Symbol 1”, “16 Round Normal Symbol 2”, “16 Round Normal” Symbol 3 ”,“ 16 round probability variation symbol 1 ”,“ 16 round probability variation symbol 2 ”,“ 7 round probability variation symbol 1 ”, and“ 7 round probability variation symbol 2 ”. Each of the 10 types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, “7 round normal symbol 1”, “7 round normal symbol 1a”, “7 round normal symbol 1b”, “7 round normal symbol 1c”, and so on.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different in the type of winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to each. That is, at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol, any one of “7 round normal symbols 1 to 3”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, and “7 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2” is selected.

  On the other hand, at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol, any one of “16 round normal symbols 1 to 3” and “16 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2” is selected. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the objects that can be selected as the winning symbol depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning symbol type with reference to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shown in FIG.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value “6”, “7”, “8”, “4”, “ 48 "and" 27 "correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. In the second column from the left, “7 round normal symbol 1”, “7 round normal symbol 2”, “7 round normal symbol 3”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “ 7 round probability variation design 1 "," 7 round probability variation design 2 "are shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of “7 round normal symbol 1” selected is 6/100 (= 6%), and the ratio of “7 round normal symbol 2” selected is It is 7/100 (= 7%). In addition, the ratio that “7 round normal symbol 3” is selected is 8/100 (= 8%), and the proportion that “16 round probability variation 1” is selected is 4/100 (= 4%). is there. In addition, the ratio that “7 round probability variation 1” is selected is 48/100 (= 48%), and the rate that “7 round probability variation 2” is selected is 27/100 (= 27%). is there. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, the selection ratio of probability variation symbols for the first special symbol as a whole is 79%.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. In addition, the EVENT values “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “06H”, “08H”, and “09H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each other in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and “7 round normal symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H00H” Will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the fourth column (right column) from the left of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of short times (limit number) given after the big hit game is ended is shown. Specific values for the number of time reductions are as follows.

In the case of “7 round normal symbol 1”, the time reduction is given 0 times. It should be noted that that the number of time reductions is given 0 means a state that is substantially the same as the state where the time reductions are not given.
In the case of “7 round normal symbol 2”, the number of time reductions is given 0 times.
In the case of “7 round normal symbol 3”, the number of time reductions is given 0 times.
As for “7 round normal symbols 1 to 3”, if the winning time is in the time shortening state, 30 times, 50 times, and 100 times may be given.

In the case of “16 round probability variation 1”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.
In the case of “7 round probability variation 1”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.
In the case of “7 round probability variation 2”, the number of time reductions is given 0 times. Therefore, when winning in “7-round probability variation 2”, the transition is made to the high probability state, but the transition to the time reduction state is not made, so the transition to the so-called latent probability variation state is made.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning symbol type with reference to the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shown in FIG.

  In the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column also shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value is “6”, “7”, “8”, “4”. , “75” corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “16 round normal symbol 1”, “16 round normal symbol 2”, “16 round normal symbol 3”, “16 round probability variation 1” corresponding to each distribution value, “16-round probability variation 2” is shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting “16 round normal symbol 1” is 6/100 (= 6%), and “16 round normal symbol 2” is selected. The ratio is 7/100 (= 7%). In addition, the ratio that “16 round normal symbol 3” is selected is 8/100 (= 8%), and the proportion that “16 round probability variation 1” is selected is 4/100 (= 4%). is there. Further, the ratio of selecting “16 round probability variation 2” is 75/100 (= 75%). Therefore, also for the second special symbol, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol as a whole is 79%. However, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, distribution values for “7 round normal symbols 1 to 3” and “7 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2” are not set.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Of these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values “03H”, “04H”, “05H”, “06H”, and “07H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “16 round normal symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described as “B2H03H”. Become.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
The fourth column from the left (right column) of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shows the value of the number of short hours given after the big hit game ends. Specific values for the number of time reductions are as follows.
In the case of “16 round normal symbol 1”, the number of time reductions is given 30 times.
In the case of “16 round normal symbol 2”, the number of time reductions is given 50 times.
In the case of “16 round normal symbol 3”, the number of time reductions is given 100 times.
In the case of “16 round probability variation 1”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.
In the case of “16 round probability variation 2”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.

  Note that the selected winning symbols are different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability state” or “time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates more frequently than in the normal time (when the time shortening function is not activated), so the second special symbol The working memory of is difficult to break. In this embodiment, since the memory for the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol, the winning type for the second special symbol is “7 round normal big hit” or “7 round probability big hit”. If “” is excluded, it becomes difficult to draw “7 round normal big hit” or “7 round probable big hit” especially in the “high probability state” and “time shortened state”, so the player's profit can be increased accordingly. There is an advantage.

[Refer to Fig. 17: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (fluctuation seconds at the time of big hit) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to 16 round big hit (16 round normal big hit or 16 round positive hit big hit) or 7 round big hit (7 round normal big hit or 7 round positive hit big hit), It is assumed that control is performed to generate a “effect” and make a big hit. The “big hit winning variation pattern selection table” defines a variation pattern corresponding to multiple types of “reach production”, and when it hits 16 round big hit or 7 round big hit, one of them is selected. Will be selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, weak super reach production, strong super reach production, story reach production, etc. (There may be other reach productions). When winning in a high probability state in which the time shortening function is activated, a variation pattern having a short variation time (a variation pattern not performing reach production) is selected without selecting a variation pattern having a long variation time. You may do it. In this case, it is necessary to prepare a selection table for each internal state or special symbol. The same applies to the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss.

  Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the winning symbol type (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is “7 round probability variation symbol 1, 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 1, 2”. In some cases, the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means). The main control CPU 72 determines the probability as the gaming state flag when the type of winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 is any one of “7 round normal symbols 1 to 3” and “16 round normal symbols 1 to 3”. The value of the variable function operation flag is reset (low probability state setting means, low probability state transition means).

  Further, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is “16 round probability variation symbol 1, 2,” “7 round probability variation symbol 1,” “16 round normal symbol 1 to In the case of “3”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag as a game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operation means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hitting is only one type of “twice open small hitting symbol”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time (the number of variation seconds at the small hit) in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 16: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. The main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407, and S2410 in FIG. 17). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than “0” in the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 17), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 refers to the random number storage area and checks whether or not the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially consumed is “0”. At this time, if the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “1” or more (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as the target special symbol (special symbol to be changed). This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “0” (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. Is specified. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Further, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. For example, if the current target special symbol is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set. The “number of working memories at the start of change (total number of memories)” set here is, for example, after this, according to the state and the number of working memories as described above in the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of deviation (step S2450 in FIG. 18). This can be referred to when setting the reach-reach group selection table.

Step S2222: The main control CPU 72 also checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) indicating the command type, and the lower byte value (for example, “00H” to “03H” indicating the number of working memories after the decrease )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BAH”) indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 17).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 16) and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag here.

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “variable winning device management process”.
Step S4355: Further, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag at the time of cut-off function operation. Thereby, when at least one of the variation time shortening function or the probability variation function is activated before the big hit game is started, the function is deactivated.
Step S4400: The main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the big hit symbol. For example, if the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round normal symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol”, a value corresponding to “16 round” is set in the continuous operation count status. In the case of “7 round normal symbol” or “7 round probability variation symbol”, a value representing “7 round” is set in the continuous operation count status. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command representing a big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 17). For example, if the type of jackpot symbol is any “16 round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value (maximum number of times) representing “16 rounds”. Further, in the case of “7 round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “7 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply a deviation (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value (01H) of the small hit flag is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (medium hit)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step 4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. In this case, “number of times cut” is used, but the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically guarantee that the “high probability state” will continue until the next winning is substantially obtained. In addition, when there is only a single “time shortening state” instead of the “high probability state”, the count-off counter is set to a standard numerical value (for example, 30, 50, 100, etc.).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. The probability variable function operation flag or the time shortening function operation flag is reset, but since the value of the count counter is not zero in the “high probability state” as described above, it is practical. It is the time reduction function activation flag that is reset above. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 8) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38c and the time reduction state display lamp 38d, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38c. The probability variation state display lamp 38c continues to be lit until the big hit game related to the special symbol is started, or until the probability variation function is turned off (inactivated) after the special symbol variation display is performed a specified number of times. Thereafter, it is switched to non-display (turned off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38d regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output.

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the continuous operation number status represented by the type of winning symbol (by number of rounds) this time. . At this time, one of the display lamps 38a and 38b designated by the value of the continuous operation number status represented by the winning symbol is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status designates “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing “16 rounds (16R)”. If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies “7 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38 a representing “7 rounds (7R)”.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes a gaming process selection process (step S5100), a special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a special winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a special winning opening closing process (step S5400), and an end. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the special winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big prize opening / closing operation process and the big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed and the time for each opening at the time of big hit or small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current gaming state is a big game, that is, whether or not the big hit flag value (01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5204. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit flag is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5212. Note that this procedure may be rewritten to refer to the value of the small hit flag (however, the logic of Yes / No is reversed).

[Procedure for jackpot]
First, the procedure for the big hit is as follows.
Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the opening pattern of the big prize opening (the number of times of opening and the time of each opening), the closing time, the interval time between rounds, and the count during one round according to the current winning symbol. Set the number (maximum number of winnings). The opening pattern for each winning symbol is the same as described in the item “plural winning types” in the special symbol game process (FIG. 16). The total of the interval time between the closing time and the round is set to about several seconds (for example, 2 seconds to 2.5 seconds) for “7 round symbols” and “16 round symbols”, for example. Note that the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is, for example, 9 for all winning symbols, but winnings rarely occur during an extremely short opening (about 0.1 seconds) ( Not impossible but extremely difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the jackpot winning symbol selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 17). Specifically, if the large category “16 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. If “7 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to seven. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value on the program (“6” for 7 times, “15” for 16 times).

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer, the release time is a sufficient time (for example, a launch control board) that the big winning opening is easily generated during one release. The set 174 is a time during which 10 or more game balls are fired, preferably 6 seconds or more. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit release timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the release time is short (becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to win a big prize opening during one opening. This is a time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the firing control board set 174).

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Procedure for small hits]
Step S5212: On the other hand, in the case of a small hit (step S5202: No), the main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times that the special winning opening is opened based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5212, for example, two times. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S5216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hitting release timer, and during such an opening time, there is hardly any winning in the big winning opening during one opening. It becomes a short time (becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launching device unit).

  Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing. Then, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening / closing operation process.

[Big prize opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening / closing operation process. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the special winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 or step S5216 in FIG. 26) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 30 (open winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round in the big hit, one in the small hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the procedure of the above steps S5302 to S5310.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. Note that the release at the time of the small hit is that the value of the release timer is set to a short time, and therefore, the main control CPU 72 normally confirms that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S5310 before step S5306. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a countdown of the interval timer set in the above-described special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 or step S5218 in FIG. 26). When the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5316.

  Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not it is in a big role (during big hit game). If the current game is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5318. On the other hand, if the current game is a small hit (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the reason why the “number of times set in the current round” is determined is to deal with an opening pattern of “opening the variable winning device 30 multiple times within one round of big hit”, for example. . In the present embodiment, since such an open pattern is not particularly employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

  If a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round as described above is employed, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, and thus the procedure from step S5302 to step S5320 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening closing process.

[Large prize closing process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a special winning opening closing process. This special winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is a big game (big hit game), and if it is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5402.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 16) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 16 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 25). Then, after execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again, and repeatedly executes the above steps S5402 to S5408. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (7 times or 16 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the end process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[Small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the number-of-releases counter.

  Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5214 in FIG. 26). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 25). Then, after the execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable prize device 30 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening (2 times).

  When the actual number of times of opening at the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

  Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the end process when the release counter is reset (= 0).

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the end process. This end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the variable prize apparatus 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5503. To do.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. Thereby, the main control CPU 72 resets the continuous operation number status value. When these procedures are executed, the main control CPU 72 turns off the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b and the like in the subsequent continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240 in FIG. 24).

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 17) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5507: When the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number cut function activation flag corresponding to the probability variation function.

  Step S5508: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability fluctuations (for example, about 10,000). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, if a huge number of times such as 10,000 is set as described above, there is almost no chance that the non-winning will continue so far (the winning probability at the time of high probability is, for example, 1/39 to 1/39) The degree of probability) will continue until the next winning. On the other hand, when a substantial upper limit is set in the high probability state, the probability variation number is set to a realistic number (for example, about 10 times) (so-called number cut probability change). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5507 and S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 17) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5511: When the value of the variable time shortening function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the count cut function operating flag corresponding to the variable time shortening function.

  Step S5512: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, about 100 times or about 10,000 times). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5511, S5512.

  Step S5514: The main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. If the high-probability state function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “reduced time”. A state designation command representing “medium” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  The procedure so far is a big hit, but in the case of a big hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

  Steps S5520 and S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H) and deletes “small hit” from the internal state flag. In the case of small hits, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S5516: In any case, after the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 16) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the jackpot internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern number (variation pattern and variation time) is uniquely determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the first special is based on the result. Fluctuation display is performed using symbols and second special symbols (symbol display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit and blinking display by 7-segment LED (or dot LED or the like), so that the appealing power is poor. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above. The variation display effect is performed based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, while the prefetching notice effect is performed based on the variation pattern prefetch information command.

  30 and 31 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to the special symbol variation display and stop display. Here, an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (out). This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from when the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) starts the variable display until the stop display (including the fixed stop). The stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
In FIG. 30 (A): For example, in the state before the special symbol starts to change (the state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), the left / middle / right effect symbols are displayed at the center position in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped. The effect symbols include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Of these, the left effect symbol and right effect symbol are displayed in a relatively large size in the left and right areas of the display screen, respectively, while the medium effect symbol is displayed in a relatively small size in the middle area of the display screen. Has been.

  Each effect design is designed, for example, a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “0” to “9”. As for the left, middle and right effect symbols, all three symbols may potentially constitute a symbol sequence arranged in descending order of numbers “9” to “0”, or the left effect symbol and the right effect. For two of the symbols, a symbol sequence in which the numbers are arranged in ascending order from “0” to “9” is potentially configured, and a symbol sequence in which the numbers are arranged in descending order from “9” to “0” for the medium effect design It may be a potentially configured aspect. In any case, such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen. Two effect symbols ("6"-"3"-"4" in the example of FIG. 30) are displayed on the display screen.

  At this time, a background image corresponding to the “daytime stage” on the effect is displayed on the display screen. The effect symbol is displayed so as to overlap the background image, but during the variable display (while scrolling), the entire effect symbol is displayed in a transparent (transparent) state, so that the visibility of the background image is improved. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the stay stage in the production.

[Memory display image]
In the lower part of the display screen, there is formed an area for displaying a stored display image indicating the presence / absence of special symbol operation memory during the game. The storage display image used in the present embodiment is configured by combining two types of a base image and a marker image. Of these, four base images are always displayed for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, corresponding to the maximum number (four) that can be stored for each symbol. Here, four pedestals MDA and MDB each having a disk shape are shown as examples of the base image. These base image pedestals MDA and MDB are formed separately on the left and right at the bottom of the display screen. Specifically, the left region includes four pedestals MDA corresponding to the first special symbol, and the right region includes Four bases MDB corresponding to the second special symbol are formed. Since these pedestals MDA and MDB indicate the presence or absence of the working memory while displaying the maximum number of working memories of the special symbol, when only the presence of the working memory is represented, MDB may not be displayed. In FIG. 30A, no marker image is displayed.

  Further, each pedestal DZ has a position as a “cradle” for placing (so-called placing) a marker image corresponding to the occurrence of operation memory, and is shown in FIG. Thus, when each of the four pedestals MDA and MDB is displayed alone (without the marker image), there is no working memory corresponding to the first special symbol (the number of memories is 0), and so on. In addition, there is no working memory corresponding to the second special symbol (the number of memories is 0).

[Fluctuating area]
The changing area HA is formed at the center position at the bottom of the display screen. In the changing area HA, a marker image corresponding to the working memory consumed by the current change is displayed for a certain period of time. For example, when the working memory corresponding to the first special symbol is consumed by the next change start, the marker image displayed at the right end (the top) on the base MDA at the bottom of the display screen is displayed in the changing area HA. It moves and is displayed there for a certain time (for example, about 1 to 2 seconds). Further, if the marker image remains on the other pedestal MDA, a display is performed in which the marker image is sequentially moved (shifted) to the right side so that the marker image disappears from the pedestal MDA at the right end. In addition, when the operation | movement memory corresponding to a 2nd special symbol is consumed, it performs in the aspect which reversed right and left. For example, the marker image displayed on the left end (top) on the pedestal MDB at the bottom of the display screen moves to the changing area HA and is displayed there for a certain time (for example, about 1 to 2 seconds). Further, if the marker image remains on the other pedestal MDB, a display is performed in which the marker image is sequentially moved (shifted) to the left side so as to close after the marker image is missing from the leftmost pedestal MDB.

  In addition, fourth symbols Z1, Z2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, are displayed at the upper right corner position of the display screen. These fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the three effect symbols of left, middle, and right, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the variation display of the effect symbols. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simply simple colors (for example, “□” figure) with a color, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the deviation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually “7 round jackpot” or “16 round jackpot” instead of “out of”, the 4th pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, red display color or green display color). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[On-hold marker appearance effect]
(B) in FIG. 30: For example, it is assumed that one working memory corresponding to the first special symbol is generated due to the occurrence of a winning at the upper start winning opening 26. In this case, a marker image representing the presence of the first working memory is newly displayed at the right end (first) position on the pedestal MDA at the bottom of the screen (stored number display effect execution means). Here, a white marker MA1 that represents the shape of the coin (the shape of the coin as viewed from the front) (first stage) is displayed as an example of the marker image. Such a white marker MA1 is positioned to indicate the existence of the working memory generated during the game, and the display number corresponds to the working memory number. Therefore, when the second operation memory is generated next, a white marker is newly displayed on the second pedestal MDA from the right, and when the third operation memory is generated, the third pedestal from the right is displayed. Another white marker is newly displayed on the MDA.

  Under the control of the main control CPU 72, the operating memory generated in the state of 0 operating memory is consumed as it is, so the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a is not lit up or is lit up in a manner representing one stored number. Immediately after it is turned off. However, in the production, by displaying the first white marker MA1 within a short time, it is clear to the player that “newly operating memory (corresponding to the first special symbol) has occurred”. Can let you know. Note that, when the first special symbol has started the variable display under the control of the main control CPU 72, the fourth symbol Z1 is displayed in a mode of the variable display.

[Pending marker movement effect]
In FIG. 30, (C): With the first consumption of the working memory, an effect of moving the white marker MA1 displayed on the rightmost pedestal MDA at the lower part of the display screen to the changing area HA is performed. Thereby, it is possible to easily tell the player that the internal lottery has been performed by consuming one working memory for the player. The consumption marker HM1 that has moved to the changing area HA is removed from the pedestal MDA, so that the so-called “hold” is identified.

[Variable display effects]
In addition, in synchronism with the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display effect is performed by scrolling the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (symbol effect execution means). That is, the display of the left effect, the middle effect, and the right effect is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in accordance with the change display of the first special symbol. Is started. In the figure, the change display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display). At this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. As already mentioned.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape of “nature outdoors in the daytime”. Such a background image is executed as, for example, a “stage effect”, and expresses that the stay stage on the effect is, for example, a “daytime stage”. In the present embodiment, the “daytime stage” corresponds to a normal state in which the above-described variation time shortening function is not activated and the probability variation function is also deactivated. In addition, various stages, zones, and modes are provided in the production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for the various stages, zones, and modes (state display production execution means). The difference between these stages, zones and modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible. Further, during the variation display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is also variably displayed, and the fourth symbol Z1 continues to express the variation display by changing its display color.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 31, (D): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design stops changing first. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped on the screen.

[Consumption marker rotation effect]
In addition, the consumption marker HM1 on the changing area HA is replaced with another image, and is changed to a consumption marker HM3 that is a marker image having a shape (third stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely from the side. Note that there is a consumption marker HM2 (a marker image in the shape of the coin as viewed obliquely (second stage)) before the consumption marker HM1 is changed to the marker image of HM3, and the coin is rotated from the front. The animation is shown in animation.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 31, (E): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “6” is stopped on the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the production symbol representing the number “4” stops, the production sequence that represents the number “5” stops by sliding the design row for one symbol, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “6” stops, the design symbol representing the number “5” stops by sliding the symbol sequence in the reverse direction by one symbol, and thereby the pattern that develops to reach. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “1” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “5” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Consumption marker non-display effect]
Further, the consumption marker HM3 on the changing area HA is replaced with another image, and is changed to a consumption marker HM5 which is a marker image having a shape (fifth stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely. Note that there is a consumption marker HM4 (a marker image in the shape (fourth stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely) from the consumption marker HM3 to the HM5 marker image, and the coin is further rotated. This is represented by a series of animations. When the consumption marker HM5 is changed, the consumption marker rotation effect is hidden on the changing area HA for a certain time (for example, about 1 to 2 seconds), and the consumption marker image is deleted. The

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 31, (F): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “2” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “5” − “2” − “6”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the first special symbol has been confirmed”.

  32 to 34 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to the change display and stop display of different special symbols. In addition, here, an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of winning (big hit). In this variable display effect, the special symbol working memory is added to the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) in the middle of the variable display, and the special symbol for the new working memory is stopped and displayed (including confirmed stop). It corresponds to a series of performances performed until. The basic flow of the change display effect and the stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 32A: For example, the special symbol displays a certain amount of time fluctuation, and the right effect symbol stops changing after the left effect symbol in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. In this example, the effect symbols representing the numbers “3” and “5” are stopped on the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation.

[On-hold marker appearance effect]
In addition, it is assumed that one working memory corresponding to the first special symbol is generated due to the winning at the upper start winning opening 26. In this case, a marker image representing the presence of the first working memory is newly displayed at the right end (first) position on the pedestal MDA at the bottom of the screen (stored number display effect execution means). Here, a white marker MA1 that represents the shape of the coin (the shape of the coin as viewed from the front) (first stage) is displayed as an example of the marker image. Such a white marker MA1 is positioned to indicate the existence of the working memory generated during the game, and the display number corresponds to the working memory number.

  At this point, the consumption marker is not displayed, that is, the marker image is after being erased.

[Stop display effect]
(B) in FIG. 32: The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “3”-“1”-“5”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the first special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Hold marker rotation effect]
Further, as time passes, the white marker MA1 of the first special symbol is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to a white marker MA3 which is a marker image having a shape (third stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely from the side. . Note that there is a white marker MA2 (a marker image of the shape of the coin (second stage) as seen from an oblique side) before changing from the white marker MA1 of the first special symbol to the marker image of MA3. The animation shows the coin rotating from the front.

[Next fluctuation start]
(C) in FIG. 32: When the stop display time of the first special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since only the working memory corresponding to the first special symbol exists in this state, the working memory is consumed in the order of storage (old order), and the variation display of the next first special symbol is started. The

[Hold marker rotation effect]
In addition, the white marker MA3 of the first special symbol is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to a white marker MA5 which is a marker image having a shape (fifth stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely from the side. Note that there is a white marker MA4 (a marker image in the shape (fourth stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely) from the time when the white marker MA3 of the first special symbol is changed to the marker image of MA5. A series of coins rotating from the front is shown in animation.

[Pending marker movement effect]
Then, with the start of the next change, the left, middle, and right effect symbols all start changing display. Further, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol is decreased by one as the change starts, the display number of the white marker MA5 is decreased by one in conjunction therewith. For example, although there was one working memory so far, the oldest (old) white marker MA5 displayed on the pedestal MDA is shifted to the changing area HA and consumed by internal lottery. The production will be performed together. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the working memory is consumed with respect to the first special symbol even in the production. The consumption marker HM5 that has moved to the changing area HA has the same shape as the white marker MA5 before the movement (the shape of the coin viewed obliquely) (fifth stage). That is, the marker image of the first special symbol and the marker image of the consumption marker are synchronized. In this way, by performing the animation in synchronization, it is possible to improve visibility and animation expression.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 33 (D): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “7” is stopped on the screen.

[Consumption marker rotation effect]
In addition, the consumption marker HM5 on the changing area HA is replaced with another image, and is changed to a consumption marker HM7 that is a marker image of a shape (seventh step) when the coin is viewed obliquely. Note that there is a consumption marker HM6 (a marker image in the shape of the coin viewed from the side (sixth stage)) before the change from the consumption marker HM5 to the marker image of HM7, and the coin rotates from the front. A series of appearances are represented by animation.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 33 (E): Next to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this time, the effect symbol representing the number “7” is stopped at the right position of the screen, and therefore, a reach state of “7”-“being changed”-“7” has occurred.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs]
In FIG. 33 (F): On the screen, an image emphasizing one line in a reach state and character information such as “reach” are displayed together. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. Furthermore, in this case, if the number “7” is aligned, the expectation level for the probability variation jackpot will be high (not the probability variation is confirmed). Can give players various tensions.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 34 (G): Following the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen, and the head of the column (front) ) To “2”, “3”, “4”,... Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (impliciting) or reminding the player that the number “7” remains without being erased to the end. If the number “6” is deleted and “7” remains in front of the screen, it means “big hit”, and if the number “7” is also deleted, it means “out of place”. In the case of a loss, for example, the number “8” is displayed on the screen after the number “7” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, and “4”, the player's tension and expectation also increase. Then, if the production progresses with the number “7” actually being erased on the screen and the number “7” remaining on the screen, the possibility of “big hit” increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at a stretch.

[On-hold marker appearance effect]
In addition, as a result of the winning at the upper start winning opening 26, one operation memory corresponding to the first special symbol is generated, and one operation memory is located at the right end (top) on the base MDA at the bottom of the screen. A marker image representing the presence of eyes is newly displayed (stored number display effect executing means). Here, a white marker MA1 that represents the shape of the coin (the shape of the coin as viewed from the front) (first stage) is displayed as an example of the marker image. Such a white marker MA1 is positioned to indicate the existence of the working memory generated during the game, and the display number corresponds to the working memory number.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs]
In FIG. 34 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it was split into a close-up, and the content that the character emits some dialogue (or silently) A notice effect (so-called cut-in notice effect) is performed after the occurrence of reach. Here, the cut-in notice effect is an effect that is easily set to appear when the special symbol that is a big hit is displayed, and the expectation of a big hit can be increased by performing the cut-in notice effect. At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 7 ”remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of“ 7 ”-“ 7 ”-“ 7 ”increases” ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

[Hold marker rotation effect]
Further, as time passes, the white marker MA1 of the first special symbol is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to a white marker MA3 which is a marker image having a shape (third stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely from the side. . Note that there is a white marker MA2 (a marker image of the shape of the coin (second stage) as seen from an oblique side) before changing from the white marker MA1 of the first special symbol to the marker image of MA3. The animation shows the coin rotating from the front.

[On-hold marker appearance effect]
Furthermore, when a winning is made at the upper start winning opening 26, one operation memory corresponding to the first special symbol is generated, and two operation memories are stored at the second position from the right on the base MDA at the bottom of the screen. A marker image representing the presence of eyes is newly displayed (stored number display effect executing means). Here, a white marker MA3 that is a marker image having the same shape as the first marker image, that is, a shape of the coin as viewed obliquely (third stage) is displayed as the marker image. Such a white marker MA3 is positioned to indicate the presence of working memory generated during the game, and the display number corresponds to the working memory number.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 34 (I): For example, the last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. In this example, the winning symbol internally corresponds to any of “7 round normal symbol 1, 2, 3”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “7 round probability variable symbol 1, 2” While making the winning symbol type undisclosed, the production symbol representing “7”, for example, “7” is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen. An effect is instructed to the player that this is the case.

[Hold marker rotation effect]
In addition, as time passes, the two white markers MA3 of the first special symbol are replaced with different images, and are changed to white markers MA5 which are marker images of a shape (fifth stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely from the side. The Rukoto. Note that there is a white marker MA4 (a marker image in the shape (fourth stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely) from the time when the white marker MA3 of the first special symbol is changed to the marker image of MA5. The animation shows the coin rotating from the front. Therefore, it represents that synchronized animation is being executed.

  FIG. 35 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the big-game effect performed during the big hit game. A basic flow of the big role production during the big hit game adopted in this embodiment will be described. The jackpot game when the winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation symbol 1” will be described.

[Director-in-chief production] [1 round]
In FIG. 35 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game, “big hit” is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the number “7”) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”. In addition, an effect image unique to the prolific effect is displayed on the display screen.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 35 (B): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and moves to the final 16 rounds, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the big hit game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. Further, the effect symbol (the number “7”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 35 (C): At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end ending effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “Fireworks mode has entered!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, it is possible to teach the player that the fireworks mode, that is, the gaming state shifts to a time reduction state and a high probability state as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

  36 to 38 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to the change display and stop display of special symbols in the time shortening state. Here, an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (out). This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed between the time when the special symbol (here, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) starts the variable display and until the stop display (including the fixed stop). To do.

  36 (A): When the big hit game is finished and the fireworks mode is entered, the background image is changed to an image in which a plurality of fireworks are launched, and the game is started in the combined state of the effect symbols before the big hit starts. It will be.

[Hold marker rotation effect]
Similarly, the on-hold marker is started in a state before the big hit. Specifically, two white markers MA5 of the first special symbol indicating the presence of the working memory are displayed on the base MDA. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that there are two working memory numbers of the first special symbol.

[Next fluctuation start]
36 (B): When the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied and only the operation memory corresponding to the first special symbol exists, the operation memory is stored in the order of storage. It is consumed (in order of oldest), and the next variable display of the first special symbol is started.

[Hold marker rotation effect]
Further, as time passes, the white marker MA5 of the first special symbol is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to a white marker MA7 that is a marker image of a shape (seventh stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely from the side. . Note that there is a white marker MA6 (a marker image of the shape of the coin (sixth stage) as seen from an oblique side) before the first special symbol white marker MA5 is changed to the marker image MA7. The animation shows how the coin is rotating.

[Pending marker movement effect]
Further, with the consumption of the working memory, there is an effect that the white marker MA7 displayed on the rightmost pedestal MDA at the lower part of the display screen is moved to the changing area HA. Thereby, it is possible to easily tell the player that the internal lottery has been performed by consuming one working memory for the player. Note that the consumption marker HM that has moved to the changing area HA is removed from the pedestal MDA to be identified as so-called “hold”. Then, the effect of moving the white marker MA7 displayed on the second pedestal MDA from the right onto the rightmost pedestal MDA is also executed. As a result, it is possible to easily tell the player that there is one more working memory in the production.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 36 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “8” is stopped on the screen.

[Consumed marker rotation effect] [Pending marker rotation effect]
Further, the consumption marker HM7 on the changing area HA is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to a consumption marker HM9 which is a marker image having a shape (9th stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely. Further, at the same time, the white marker MA7 of the first special symbol is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to a white marker MA9 which is a marker image of the shape (9th stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely from the side. . Therefore, it represents that the consumption marker and the reserved marker of the first special symbol are changed to the same image in synchronization.

[Reservation marker appearance effect (second special design)]
In addition, it is assumed that one working memory corresponding to the second special symbol is generated due to the occurrence of the winning at the lower start winning opening 28a. In this case, a marker image representing the presence of the first working memory is newly displayed at the left end (first) position on the pedestal MDB at the bottom of the screen (stored number display effect execution means). Here, a gray marker MB9, which is a marker image of the shape (9th stage) when the same coin as the reserved marker and the consumption marker of the first special symbol is viewed obliquely from the side, is displayed. Therefore, it represents that the consumption marker, the holding marker of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol are synchronously displaying the same image.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 37 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped on the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation.

[Hold marker rotation effect]
In addition, the white marker MA9 of the first special symbol is replaced with another image, and is changed to the white marker MA1 which is a marker image of the shape of the coin viewed from the front (first stage). Further, at the same time, the gray marker MB9 of the second special symbol is replaced with another image, and is changed to the gray marker MB1 which is a marker image of the shape of the coin viewed from the front (first stage). Therefore, it represents that the holding markers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed to the same image in synchronization.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 37 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “0” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8” − “0” − “1”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the first special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Hold marker rotation effect]
Further, the white marker MA1 of the first special symbol is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to a white marker MA3 which is a marker image having a shape (third stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely from the side. At the same time, the second special symbol gray marker MB1 is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to a gray marker MB3 which is a marker image having a shape (third stage) as seen from the side of the coin. . Therefore, it represents that the holding markers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed to the same image in synchronization.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 37 (F): When the stop display time of the first special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since the working memory corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol exists in this state, the working memory corresponding to the second special symbol is preferentially consumed, and the working memory is stored. Consumed in the order of storage (oldest first), the next variable display of the second special symbol is started.

[Hold marker rotation effect]
In addition, the white marker MA3 of the first special symbol is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to a white marker MA5 which is a marker image having a shape (fifth stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely from the side. At the same time, the second special symbol gray marker MB3 is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to a gray marker MB5 which is a marker image having a shape (fifth stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely from the side. .

[Pending marker movement effect]
Then, with the start of the next change, the left, middle, and right effect symbols all start changing display. Further, since the number of working memories of the second special symbol decreases by one as the change starts, the display number of the gray marker MB5 is decreased by one in conjunction therewith. For example, although there was one working memory so far, the oldest (old) gray marker MB5 displayed on the pedestal MDB is shifted to the changing area HA and consumed by internal lottery. The production will be performed together. Thereby, the player can be informed of the fact that the working memory is consumed for the second special symbol. Further, the consumption marker HM5 that has moved to the changing area HA has the same shape as the gray marker MB5 before movement (the shape of the coin as viewed obliquely) (fifth stage). That is, the marker image of the second special symbol and the marker image of the consumption marker are synchronized. In this way, by performing the animation in synchronization, it is possible to improve visibility and animation expression.

[Left design stop]
FIG. 38 (G): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design stops changing first. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “4” is stopped on the screen.

[Consumed marker rotation effect] [Pending marker rotation effect]
In addition, the consumption marker HM5 on the changing area HA is replaced with another image, and is changed to a consumption marker HM7 that is a marker image of a shape (seventh step) when the coin is viewed obliquely. Further, at the same time, the white marker MA5 of the first special symbol is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to the white marker MA7 which is a marker image having a shape (seventh stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely from the side. . Therefore, it represents that the consumption marker and the reserved marker of the first special symbol are changed to the same image in synchronization.

[Reservation marker appearance effect (second special design)]
In addition, as a result of winning a prize at the lower start winning opening 28a, one working memory corresponding to the second special symbol is generated, and one working memory is located at the left end (top) position on the base MDB at the bottom of the screen. A marker image representing the presence of eyes is newly displayed (stored number display effect executing means). Here, a gray marker MB7, which is a marker image of the shape (seventh stage) of the same coin as the reserved marker and the consumption marker of the first special symbol when viewed obliquely from the side, is displayed. Therefore, it represents that the consumption marker, the holding marker of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol are synchronously displaying the same image.

[Right design stop]
In FIG. 38 (H): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops changing thereafter. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped on the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation.

[Hold marker rotation effect]
Also, the white marker MA7 of the first special symbol is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to a white marker MA9 which is a marker image having a shape (9th stage) as seen from an oblique side. At the same time, the second special symbol gray marker MB7 is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to a gray marker MB9 which is a marker image having a shape (9th stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely from the side. . Therefore, it represents that the holding markers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed to the same image in synchronization.

[On-hold marker appearance effect (first special symbol)]
In addition, as a result of winning a prize at the upper start winning opening 26, one operation memory corresponding to the first special symbol is generated, and two operation memories are stored at the second position from the right on the base MDA at the bottom of the screen. A marker image representing the presence of eyes is newly displayed (stored number display effect executing means). Here, a white marker MA9 which is a marker image of the shape (9th stage) of the same coin as the holding marker and the consumption marker of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. Therefore, it represents that the consumption marker, the holding marker of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol are synchronously displaying the same image.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 38 (I): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missed) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (missing) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen, and in this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “4”-“1”-“5”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the second special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Hold marker rotation effect]
In addition, the white marker MA9 of the first special symbol is replaced with another image, and is changed to the white marker MA1 which is a marker image of the shape of the coin viewed from the front (first stage). Further, at the same time, the gray marker MB9 of the second special symbol is replaced with another image, and is changed to the gray marker MB1 which is a marker image of the shape of the coin viewed from the front (first stage). Therefore, it represents that the holding markers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed to the same image in synchronization.

[Reservation marker appearance effect (second special design)]
In addition, as a result of winning a prize at the lower start winning opening 28a, one operation memory corresponding to the second special symbol is generated, and two operation memories are stored at the second position from the left on the base MDB at the bottom of the screen. A marker image representing the presence of eyes is newly displayed (stored number display effect executing means). Here, a gray marker MB1, which is a marker image of the shape (first stage) of the same coin as the reserved marker and consumption marker of the first special symbol as viewed from the front, is displayed. Therefore, it represents that the same image is displayed in synchronization with the holding marker of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The above is an example of the effects related to the change display effect and stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change, and the hold marker and consumption marker performed as appropriate. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect. In addition, it is possible to clearly tell the player how many working memories of special symbols are currently stored by the effect related to the holding marker. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game by instructing the player with an effect of changing the image of the holding marker in stages, that is, animation. Then, with respect to this animation, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are synchronized, that is, step by step while keeping the shape of the reserved marker of the first special symbol and the shape of the reserved marker of the second special symbol. By changing to, visibility and animation expression are improved. Furthermore, not only the animation by the holding marker between the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) but also the animation by the holding marker of the special symbol and the animation by the consumption marker are similarly synchronized. Therefore, further improvement of visibility and animation expression is realized.

  In the above-mentioned production example, with the start of the change display of the special symbol, the hold marker representing the working memory has moved from the base MDA or MDB at the bottom of the screen as the consumption marker at the same stage on the changing area HA. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the previous stop display of the special symbol, the movement may be performed on the changing area HA. In the above effect example, the marker image of the moved consumption marker is changed stepwise during the special symbol variation display, and is erased (non-displayed) after a predetermined time, but this is limited to this. For example, the consumption marker image may be erased (non-displayed) with the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol. When a game ball enters (wins) the upper start winning opening 26 (or the lower starting winning opening 28a) while waiting for a special symbol change display (when a new working memory is added). The consumption marker may appear on the changing area HA together with the start of the change of the special symbol, and the consumption marker image may be erased (not displayed) immediately after that.

[Direction control method]
Next, an effect control method performed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. As described above, the variable display effect, stop display effect, reach effect, hold marker appearance effect, hold marker rotation effect, hold marker movement effect, consumption marker rotation effect, stage effect linked to the symbol effect, big hit ( The major player) production, mode transition production, etc. are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of effect control processing executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S402), effect symbol management process (step S403), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), and acoustic driving. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. In addition, examples of the command for presentation transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a special look-ahead information command, a variation pattern pre-read information command, a (special symbol) effect command when the number of working memories increases, and a (special symbol) decrease of the number of working memories Time effect command, start opening winning tone control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot There are an end effect command, a count cut counter value command, and the like.

  Step S402: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls execution of the above-described hold marker appearance effect, hold marker rotation effect, hold marker movement effect, and consumption marker rotation effect. The on-hold marker appearance effect, the on-hold marker rotation effect, the on-hold marker movement effect, and the consumption marker rotation effect can be executed based on the effect command at the time of increase in the number of working memories and the effect command at the time of decrease in the number of action memories received from the main control CPU 72. . The details of the working memory effect management process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S403: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbols, or controls the effect contents during the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various notice effects (an effect before the occurrence of reach, an effect after the occurrence of reach, etc.) or an effect pattern of the lines effect. The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed contents of the effect (acts as various effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, the decorative body lamp 404, and the like based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random numbers include, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal stage transition lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the decorative body motor 402, for example. As a result, the decorative body 400 operates by the functions of the decorative body motor 402 and the link mechanism, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process.
Step S450: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the effect command at the time of increasing the number of operating memories is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S452. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command at the time of increasing the number of operating memories is stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S452.

  Step S452: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern for displaying a marker image corresponding to the increased total stored number. Specifically, a reserved marker appearance effect corresponding to the type of special symbol is executed. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S454: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories is decreased is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. As a result, when the production command when the number of working memories decreases is stored (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S456. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command at the time of reducing the number of operating memories is stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S456.

  Step S456: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, an effect pattern (marker image shift display pattern) for displaying a marker image corresponding to the total stored number after reduction is selected. Specifically, the reserved marker movement effect corresponding to the type of special symbol is executed. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S460: The effect control CPU 126 executes a pending marker effect setting process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 sets execution of the reserved marker rotation effect. For example, by setting a marker image to be displayed at the time of processing, the marker image of the first special symbol is changed from the white marker MA1 to MA2, thereby realizing an animation in which a coin rotates. Further, when there is an operation memory of the first special symbol and an operation memory of the second special symbol and each marker image is displayed, a process of synchronizing them is also executed. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S485: The effect control CPU 126 executes a consumption marker effect setting process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 sets execution of the consumption marker rotation effect. For example, by setting a marker image to be displayed at the time of processing, the marker image is changed from the marker MH3 to MH4, thereby realizing an animation in which a coin rotates. Moreover, the process which synchronizes the marker image of the operation | movement memory of the special symbol before moving and the marker image of a consumption marker is also performed. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  When the above procedure is executed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 39).

[Direction selection process when working memory increases]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S461: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect command analysis processing when the number of working memories increases. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 corresponds to which special symbol the effect command at the time of increase in the number of operating memories received in the previous process (step S450) corresponds to which special memory. Check if it is a thing.

  For example, when the value of the production command when the number of working memories increases is “BAH01H”, the type of the special symbol is “first special symbol”, and the number of working memories is “first”. It is confirmed. In addition, for “BAH02H”, “BAH03H”, and “BAH04H”, “second of the first special symbol”, “third of the first special symbol”, and “fourth of the first special symbol”, respectively. ".

  Further, when the value of the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories is “BBH01H”, the type of the special symbol is “second special symbol” and the number of working memories is “first”. It is confirmed. In addition, for “BBH02H”, “BBH03H”, and “BBH04H”, the “second special symbol second”, the “second special symbol third”, and the “second special symbol fourth”, respectively. ".

  In this way, it is determined which special symbol the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories received in the previous process (step S450) corresponds to, and what number of working memories. If confirmed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S462.

  Step S462: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the number of working memories is the first. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the type of the working memory number analyzed in the previous process (step S461) is “first”. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the number of working memories is the first (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S466. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the number of working memories is not the first (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S464.

  Step S464: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the value of the reserved marker counter corresponding to the special symbol type analyzed in the previous process (step S461).

  Here, the pending marker counter indicates the type of marker image to be displayed from now on, and a value of 0 to 10 is stored as the value of the pending marker counter. For example, when “1” is stored as the value of the holding marker counter, it indicates that the marker image of “marker material number 1” is displayed. Similarly, “2” to “10” indicate that marker images of “marker material number 2” to “marker material number 10” are displayed, respectively. Note that when “0” is stored as the value of the pending marker counter, this indicates that the marker image is not displayed, and indicates that there is no working memory. The specific contents of the marker material number will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  In addition, the reserved marker counter has a first special symbol reserved marker counter corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special symbol reserved marker counter corresponding to the second special symbol. Therefore, when the special symbol type analyzed in the previous process (step S461) is “first special symbol”, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the value of the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol, and the special symbol type. Is “second special symbol”, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol.

  Thus, referring to the value of the target holding marker counter (any one of “1” to “10”), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S480.

  Step S466: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the reserved marker counter of another special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the value of the pending marker counter corresponding to a type different from the type of the special symbol analyzed in the previous process (step S461).

  For example, when the type of the special symbol analyzed in the previous process (step S461) is “first special symbol”, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol, and the type of special symbol Is “second special symbol”, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S468.

  Step S468: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the holding marker counter of another special symbol is larger than zero. Specifically, the value of the reserved marker counter of another special symbol referred to in the previous process (step S466) is compared with “0” to check whether the value of the reserved marker counter is large. As a result of this confirmation, if the value of the holding marker counter of another special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S470. On the other hand, when the value of the holding marker counter of another special symbol is not greater than 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S475.

  Note that the value of the pending marker counter being 0 indicates that there is no working memory for the special symbol as described above, and therefore, in this process, whether there is a working memory for another special symbol. If the operation memory of another special symbol exists (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S470, and if it does not exist (No), the effect control CPU 126 Next, step S475 may be executed.

  Step S470: The effect control CPU 126 sets the holding marker counter of the target special symbol to be the same. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130, sets the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol to the same value as the value of the reserved marker counter of another special symbol, and stores it. In addition, when the operation memory of the target special symbol is the first (step S462: Yes), since the value of the holding marker counter of the target special symbol is 0, this process allows another special symbol to be stored. This indicates that the value is changed to the value of the holding marker counter (any one of 1 to 10).

  For example, assuming that the target special symbol is “first special symbol”, another special symbol is “second special symbol”, and the holding marker counter value of the second special symbol is “7”, the production control CPU 126 The value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol is set to “7” and stored in the counter buffer area of the RAM 130. In addition, assuming that the target special symbol is “second special symbol”, another special symbol is “first special symbol”, and the value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol is “3”, the production control The CPU 126 sets the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol to “3” and stores it in the counter buffer area of the RAM 130.

  As described above, when the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol is set to the same value as the value of the reserved marker counter of another special symbol, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S480.

  Step S475: The effect control CPU 126 sets the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol to “1”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol to “1” and stores it. If the operation memory of the target special symbol is the first (step S462: Yes), the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol is 0, and the reserved marker counter of another special symbol is further stored. Since the value is 0 (step S468: No), it indicates that the operation memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not exist. Therefore, “1” is set as the value of the reserved marker counter of the special symbol of the first target.

  For example, assuming that the target special symbol is “first special symbol”, the effect control CPU 126 sets the value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol to “1” and stores it in the counter buffer area of the RAM 130. In addition, assuming that the target special symbol is “second special symbol”, the effect control CPU 126 sets the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol to “1” and stores it in the counter buffer area of the RAM 130. To do.

  Step S480: The effect control CPU 126 executes an execution setting process for the reserved marker appearance effect of the target special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 is referred to in the previous process (step S464, step S470, or step S475), or based on the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol that has been set. Set to execute the reserved marker appearance effect of the symbol. For example, a marker image corresponding to the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol is selected, and a setting for executing an effect of causing the selected marker image to appear (display) at a predetermined location in the display screen is performed.

  Next, a marker image selected based on the reserved marker counter will be described.

[Correspondence table of marker material number and each special symbol marker]
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a correspondence table of marker material numbers and special symbol markers. Specific contents will be described below.

  This correspondence table is a table for associating marker images, which are materials used for production related to the reserved markers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and marker material numbers, which are numbers for identifying the marker images. . The marker material number corresponds to the value of the holding marker counter or a consumption marker counter described later. The reserved marker of the first special symbol is composed of 10 types of marker images having different shapes, and the reserved marker of the second special symbol is similarly configured of 10 types of marker images having different shapes. The marker image of the first special symbol and the marker image of the second special symbol corresponding to each marker material number that is configured are formed as marker images having the same shape and different color types.

  These marker images are used in an effect relating to the holding marker and the consumption marker described later, that is, in an animation. For example, when the value of the pending marker counter is “7”, this indicates that the marker image with the marker material number “7” is selected.

  For example, when the type of the target special symbol is “first special symbol” and the value of the holding marker counter is “1”, the shape of the coin (the shape of the coin viewed from the front) (first stage) A white marker image is selected. Similarly, when the type of the special symbol is “first special symbol” and the value of the holding marker counter is “2” to “5”, the shape of the coin viewed obliquely (second to fifth steps). A white marker image of (eye) (different viewing angle) is selected. In addition, when the type of the special symbol is “first special symbol” and the value of the holding marker counter is “6”, a white marker image having a shape (sixth stage) when the coin is viewed from the side is selected. The In addition, when the special symbol type is “first special symbol” and the value of the holding marker counter is “7” to “10”, the shape of the coin viewed obliquely (from the seventh to the tenth steps). ) White marker images (different viewing angles) are selected.

  In addition, when the type of the target special symbol is “second special symbol” and the value of the holding marker counter is “1”, the shape of the coin (the shape of the coin viewed from the front) (one step) A gray marker image representing the eye) is selected. Similarly, when the type of the special symbol is “second special symbol” and the value of the holding marker counter is “2” to “5”, the shape of the coin viewed obliquely (second to fifth steps). Eye) Gray marker images (each with a different viewing angle) are selected. Further, when the special symbol type is “second special symbol” and the value of the holding marker counter is “6”, a gray marker image in the shape of the coin viewed from the side (step 6) is selected. The In addition, when the special symbol type is “second special symbol” and the value of the holding marker counter is “7” to “10”, the shape of the coin viewed obliquely (from the seventh to the tenth steps). ) Gray marker images (each with a different viewing angle) are selected.

  As described above, the number of types of marker images of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not limited to ten, and may be twenty or thirty.

[Production setting process when the number of working memories increases: See FIG. 41]
In the process in step S480, the effect control CPU 126 selects a marker image corresponding to the type of the target special symbol and the value of the reserved marker counter, and the selected marker image appears at a predetermined location on the display screen ( Set to execute the effect to be displayed. The place where the selected marker image appears is set based on the type of special symbol confirmed in the previous processing step S461 and the number of working memories.

  For example, when the type of the special symbol is “first special symbol”, the number of working memories is “first”, and the holding marker counter value is “1”, the effect control CPU 126 displays the pedestal MDA at the right end at the bottom of the display screen A setting is made to display a white marker image of the marker material number “1” on top (for example, (B) in FIG. 30). Similarly, when the type of the special symbol is “first special symbol”, the number of working memories is “second”, and the holding marker counter value is “3”, the effect control CPU 126 displays 2 from the lower right of the display screen. Setting is made to display a white marker image of the marker material number “3” on the th base MDA (for example, (H) in FIG. 34).

  In addition, when the type of the special symbol is “second special symbol”, the number of working memories is “first”, and the holding marker counter value is “7”, the effect control CPU 126 displays the lower left corner of the display screen. Settings are made to display a gray marker image of the marker material number “7” on the pedestal MDB (for example, (G) in FIG. 38). Similarly, when the type of the special symbol is “second special symbol”, the number of working memories is “second”, and the holding marker counter value is “1”, the effect control CPU 126 displays 2 from the left at the bottom of the display screen. Settings are made to display a gray marker image of the marker material number “1” on the th base MDB (for example, (I) in FIG. 38).

  When the execution of the reserved marker appearance effect of the target special symbol is set, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S481.

  Step S481: The effect control CPU 126 sets the number of reserved markers for the target special symbol. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 sets the number of reserved markers of the target special symbol based on the type of special symbol confirmed in the previous process (step S461) and the number of working memories. The number of reserved markers for the target special symbol is set by accessing the buffer area of the RAM 130 and storing the value of the number of reserved markers corresponding to the target special symbol.

  For example, when the special symbol type is “first special symbol” and the number of working memories is “first”, the number of reserved markers of the first special symbol is set to “1” and stored. Similarly, in the case of “the second of the first special symbol”, “the third of the first special symbol”, and “the fourth of the first special symbol”, the number of reserved markers of the first special symbol is “ “2”, “3”, “4” are set and stored.

  In addition, when the type of the special symbol is “second special symbol” and the number of operating memories is “first”, the number of reserved markers of the second special symbol is set to “1” and stored. Similarly, when “the second special symbol is the second”, “the second special symbol is the third”, and “the second special symbol is the fourth”, the number of reserved markers of the second special symbol is “ “2”, “3”, “4” are set and stored.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the working memory effect management process (FIG. 40).

[Direction selection process when the number of working memories decreases]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the effect selection process when the number of working memories decreases. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S486: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect command analysis processing when the number of working memories decreases. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 corresponds to which special symbol the special command to which the production command at the time of reduction of the number of working memories received in the previous process (step S454) corresponds, and to which number of working memories. Check if it is a thing.

  For example, when the value of the production command when the number of working memories increases is “BAH10H”, the special symbol type is “first special symbol” and the number of working memories is “first”. It is confirmed. It should be noted that the number of working memories is “first” means that the number of working memories is changed from 1 to 0, that is, the number of working memories no longer exists after the internal lottery for the first special symbol is executed. Represents. In addition, for “BAH11H”, “BAH12H”, and “BAH13H”, “second of the first special symbol”, “third of the first special symbol”, and “fourth of the first special symbol”, respectively. ". It should be noted that the number of working memories is “second” to “fourth” means that the internal lottery for the first special symbol is executed and the number of working memories is two to one, three to two, This represents a decrease from four to three.

  In addition, when the value of the production command when the number of working memories increases is “BBH10H”, the type of the special symbol is “second special symbol” and the number of working memories is “first”. It is confirmed. In addition, for “BBH11H”, “BBH12H”, and “BBH13H”, “the second of the second special symbol”, “the third of the second special symbol”, and “the fourth of the second special symbol”, respectively. ".

  In this way, it is determined which special symbol the operation command at the time of increasing the number of working memories received in the previous process (step S454) corresponds to, and what number of working memories. If confirmed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S488.

  Step S488: The effect control CPU 126 performs setting to execute the reserved marker movement effect of the target special symbol. Specifically, the setting for executing the reserved marker movement effect of the target special symbol is performed based on the type of special symbol confirmed in the previous process (step S486) and the number of working memories.

  For example, when the type of the target special symbol is “first special symbol” and the number of working memories is “first”, the effect control CPU 126 displays the marker image on the pedestal MDA at the lower right of the display screen in the center. Settings are made to execute an effect of moving on the base HA (for example, (C) in FIG. 30). Similarly, when the type of the target special symbol is “first special symbol” and the number of working memories is “second”, the effect control CPU 126 centers the marker image on the pedestal MDA at the bottom right of the display screen. Is set to execute an effect of moving the marker image on the second pedestal MDA to the rightmost pedestal MDA (for example, (B) in FIG. 36).

  In addition, when the type of the target special symbol is “second special symbol” and the number of working memories is “first”, the effect control CPU 126 displays the marker image on the leftmost pedestal MDB at the bottom of the display screen. Is set so as to execute an effect of moving to the center pedestal HA (for example, (F) in FIG. 37).

  When the setting for executing the reserved marker movement effect of the target special symbol is performed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S490.

  Step S490: The effect control CPU 126 sets the type of consumption marker. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 sets the type of consumption marker to the same type as the type of special symbol confirmed in the previous process (step S486). Thereby, the marker image used for the consumption marker rotation effect is set to the same image as the marker image of the first special symbol or the marker image of the second special symbol.

  For example, when the type of the target special symbol is “first special symbol”, the effect control CPU 126 changes the type of the consumption marker to “first special symbol”, so that the marker image used for the consumption marker rotation effect. Can be set as a white coin-shaped marker image. On the other hand, when the type of the target special symbol is “second special symbol”, the effect control CPU 126 changes the type of the consumption marker to “second special symbol”, so that the marker image used for the consumption marker rotation effect. Can be set to a gray coin-shaped marker image.

  When the type of consumption marker is set, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S492.

  Step S492: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the value of the reserved marker counter corresponding to the special symbol type confirmed in the previous process (step S486).

  For example, when the type of the target special symbol is “first special symbol”, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol stored in the counter buffer area of the RAM 130. On the other hand, when the type of the target special symbol is “second special symbol”, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol stored in the counter buffer area of the RAM 130.

  When referring to the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S494.

  Step S494: The effect control CPU 126 sets a consumption marker counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130, and sets and stores the same value as the value of the pending marker counter referenced in the previous process (step S494) as the value of the consumption marker counter.

  For example, when the value of the on-hold marker counter referred to is “5”, the effect control CPU 126 sets the value of the consumption marker counter in the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 to the same “5” and stores it.

  When the consumption marker counter is set, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S496.

  Step S496: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the number of working memories is the first. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the type of the working memory number analyzed in the previous process (step S486) is “first”. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the number of working memories is the first (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S498. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the number of working memories is not the first (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S499.

  Step S498: The effect control CPU 126 resets the holding marker counter of the target special symbol to 0. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130, sets the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol to “0”, and stores it. In addition, when the working memory of the target special symbol is the first (step S496: Yes), the working memory of the target special symbol is consumed, so the working memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Indicates that each does not exist. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S499.

  Step S499: The effect control CPU 126 sets the number of reserved markers of the target special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the number of reserved markers for the target special symbol based on the type of special symbol confirmed in the previous process (step S486) and the number of working memories. The number of reserved markers for the target special symbol is set by accessing the buffer area of the RAM 130 and storing the value of the number of reserved markers corresponding to the target special symbol.

  For example, when the special symbol type is “first special symbol” and the number of working memories is “first”, the number of reserved markers of the first special symbol is set to “0” and stored. Similarly, in the case of “the second of the first special symbol”, “the third of the first special symbol”, and “the fourth of the first special symbol”, the number of reserved markers of the first special symbol is “ “1”, “2” and “3” are set and stored.

  In addition, when the type of the special symbol is “second special symbol” and the number of working memories is “first”, the number of reserved markers of the second special symbol is set to “0” and stored. Similarly, when “the second special symbol is the second”, “the second special symbol is the third”, and “the second special symbol is the fourth”, the number of reserved markers of the second special symbol is “ “1”, “2” and “3” are set and stored.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the working memory effect management process (FIG. 40).

[Hold marker effect setting processing]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the hold marker effect setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the stored value of the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the holding marker counter of the first special symbol is greater than zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol referred to in the previous process (step S700) is a value greater than zero. As a result of this confirmation, when the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S704. On the other hand, when the holding marker counter of the first special symbol is not larger than 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S710.

  Although not shown in the figure, before executing step S704, it is confirmed whether or not the time for one frame has elapsed since the previous marker image was selected, and the time for one frame has elapsed ( Yes) Next, step S704 is executed, and if the time for one frame has not elapsed (No), step S710 may be executed without executing step S704. Similarly, it is confirmed whether or not it is a timing (one frame) for changing an image (for example, a design symbol, a background image, a preview image) in the display screen. If it is the timing (Yes), then step S704 is performed. If the timing is not reached (No), step S710 may be executed without executing step S704. The same applies to the second special symbol described later.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the number of reserved markers of the first special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the stored value of the number of reserved markers of the first special symbol. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S706.

  Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 performs setting to execute the reserved marker rotation effect of the first special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 determines the value of the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol referred to in the previous process (step S700) and the number of reserved markers of the first special symbol referred to in the previous process (step S704). Based on this value, the setting for executing the reserved marker rotation effect of the first special symbol is performed. That is, the marker image corresponding to the value of the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol is selected, and the selected marker image is displayed at a predetermined location (on the pedestal MDA) in the display screen.

  For example, when the value of the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol is “3” and the value of the number of reserved markers is “1”, the effect control CPU 126 displays the marker material number “ 3 ”is displayed (for example, (B) in FIG. 32). Similarly, when the value of the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol is “5” and the value of the number of reserved markers is “2”, the effect control CPU 126 is the second pedestal MDA from the right end at the bottom of the display screen and from the right. A setting is made to display a white marker image of the marker material number “5” on the top (for example, (H) in FIG. 34).

  When the execution setting of the reserved marker rotation effect of the first special symbol is set, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S708.

  Step S708: The effect control CPU 126 updates the holding marker counter of the first special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and updates and stores the value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol. Note that there is regularity in updating the value of the pending marker counter, and updating is performed by adding “1” to the value before processing, or when the value before processing is “10”, the value is returned to “1”. Update. That is, the values from “1” to “10” are repeatedly updated in order. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S710.

  Step S710: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the stored value of the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S712.

  Step S712: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the holding marker counter of the second special symbol is greater than zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol referred to in the previous process (step S710) is a value greater than zero. As a result of the confirmation, if the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S714. On the other hand, when the holding marker counter of the second special symbol is not larger than 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the operation memory effect management process (FIG. 40).

  Step S714: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the number of reserved markers of the second special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the stored value of the number of reserved markers of the second special symbol. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S716.

  Step S716: The effect control CPU 126 performs setting to execute the reserved marker rotation effect of the second special symbol. Specifically, the presentation control CPU 126 determines the value of the second special symbol holding marker counter referred to in the previous processing (step S710) and the number of the second special symbol holding markers referred to in the previous processing (step S714). Based on this value, the setting for executing the reserved marker rotation effect of the second special symbol is performed. That is, a marker image corresponding to the value of the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol is selected, and a process of displaying the selected marker image at a predetermined location (on the pedestal MDA) in the display screen is performed.

  For example, when the value of the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol is “3” and the value of the number of retained markers is “1”, the effect control CPU 126 displays the marker material number “on” on the leftmost base MDB at the bottom of the display screen. 3 ”is displayed (for example, (E) in FIG. 37). Similarly, when the value of the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol is “9” and the value of the number of retained markers is “1”, the effect control CPU 126 displays the marker material number on the leftmost base MDB at the bottom of the display screen. Setting is made to display a gray marker image of “9” (for example, (H) in FIG. 38).

  When the execution of the reserved marker rotation effect of the second special symbol is set, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S718.

  Step S718: The effect control CPU 126 updates the holding marker counter of the second special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and updates and stores the value of the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol. In addition, there is regularity in updating the value of the pending marker counter, updating is performed by incrementing the value by 1 from “1” to “10” in order, and updating is performed to return to “1” after “10”. . That is, the values from “1” to “10” are repeatedly updated in order.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the working memory effect management process (FIG. 40).

[Consumption marker production setting processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of consumption marker effect setting processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S730: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the consumption marker counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the stored value of the consumption marker counter. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S732.

  Step S732: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the consumption marker counter is greater than zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the consumption marker counter referred to in the previous process (step S730) is a value greater than zero. As a result of the confirmation, if the consumption marker counter is greater than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S734. On the other hand, when the consumption marker counter is not greater than 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the operation memory effect management process (FIG. 40).

  Step S734: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the type of consumption marker. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the type of the consumption marker is “first special symbol” or “second special symbol”. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S736.

  Step S736: The effect control CPU 126 performs setting to execute the consumption marker rotation effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs a consumption marker rotation effect based on the value of the consumption marker counter referred to in the previous process (step S730) and the type of consumption marker referred to in the previous process (step S734). Set to execute. That is, a marker image corresponding to the value of the consumption marker counter and of the type of consumption marker “first special symbol” or “second special symbol” is selected, and the selected marker image is displayed at a predetermined location on the display screen. A process of displaying on the pedestal HA is performed.

  For example, when the type of consumption marker is “first special symbol” and the value of the consumption marker counter is “7”, the effect control CPU 126 has the marker material number “7” on the base HA at the bottom of the display screen. Settings are made to display a white marker image (for example, (D) in FIG. 33). Similarly, when the type of consumption marker is “second special symbol” and the value of the consumption marker counter is “7”, the effect control CPU 126 displays the marker material number “7” on the base HA at the bottom of the display screen. The gray marker image is set to be displayed (for example, (G) in FIG. 38).

  When execution of the consumption marker rotation effect is set, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S738.

  Step S738: The effect control CPU 126 updates the consumption marker counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130, and updates and stores the value of the consumption marker counter. It should be noted that the consumption marker counter value is regularly updated, and is updated by adding “1” to the value before processing, or is reset to “1” when the value before processing is “10”. Update. That is, the values from “1” to “10” are repeatedly updated in order. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S740.

  Step S740: The effect control CPU 126 updates the consumption marker timer counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130, and updates and stores the value of the consumption marker timer counter. Here, the consumption marker timer counter represents an effect time during which a consumption marker rotation effect is being executed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S742.

  Step S742: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the consumption marker timer counter is larger than the specified value. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 refers to the value of the consumption marker timer counter stored in the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 in the previous process (step S740), and compares the referenced value with a specified value (for example, 5 seconds). By doing this, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the consumption marker timer counter is larger than the specified value. As a result of this confirmation, when the value of the consumption marker timer counter is larger than the specified value (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S744. On the other hand, when the value of the consumption marker timer counter is not larger than the specified value (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the operation memory effect management process (FIG. 40).

  Step S744: The effect control CPU 126 resets the consumption marker counter to zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets the value of the consumption marker counter to “0” and stores it. Therefore, when this consumption marker effect setting process (step S485 in FIG. 40) is executed next time, the value of the consumption marker counter confirmed in step S732 is 0 (No), so the consumption marker rotation effect is executed (step S736) indicates that the consumption marker rotation effect is finished (not displayed). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S746.

  Step S746: The effect control CPU 126 resets the value of the consumption marker timer counter to zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets the value of the consumption marker timer counter to “0” and stores it. That is, the effect time related to the consumption marker rotation effect to be executed next time is reset to 0 seconds.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the working memory effect management process (FIG. 40).

  Next, a marker image (marker material number) to be set (selected) at the time of the on-hold marker appearance effect and the on-hold marker rotation effect in the above process will be described in time series. Specifically, a game ball enters (wins) each starting winning opening during the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), and the working memory of the corresponding special symbol increases. About the marker material number to be selected when the reserved marker appearance effect representing the increase in the working memory is executed, and when the reserved marker rotation effect showing that the working memory exists is executed Explain in chronological order.

[Example of marker material number setting (part 1)]
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a setting example of marker material numbers (part 1). Specific contents will be described below.

  The “frame number” is shown at the top of this setting example, and the time when the marker image is changed is shown. For example, the frame number “1F” corresponds to time 1t, and “2F” corresponds to time 2t. The time t corresponds to, for example, 0.1 second.

  In the second row from the top, “first special symbol first” is shown, and the marker material number of the marker image displayed (selected) on the rightmost base MDA at the bottom of the display screen is displayed. Has been. For example, the frame number “1F” indicates that the marker material number “1” is displayed on the rightmost pedestal MDA. Similarly, on the 3rd to 5th tiers from the top, "first special symbol 2nd", "first special symbol 3rd" and "first special symbol 4th" are shown, respectively. The marker material numbers of the marker images displayed (selected) on the pedestal MDA (second, third, fourth from the right) at the bottom of the display screen are shown.

  In the sixth row from the top, the “second special symbol first” is shown, and the marker material number of the marker image displayed (selected) on the leftmost pedestal MDB at the bottom of the display screen is displayed. Has been. For example, the frame number “11F” indicates that the marker material number “1” is displayed on the leftmost pedestal MDB. Similarly, on the 7th to 9th tiers from the top, "2nd special design 2nd", "2nd special design 3rd" and "2nd special design 4th" are shown respectively. The marker material numbers of the marker images displayed (selected) on the pedestal MDB (second, third, fourth from the left) at the bottom of the display screen are shown.

  In the bottom row, “consumption marker” is shown, and the marker material number of the marker image displayed (selected) on the base HA at the bottom of the display screen is shown.

  Next, description will be made in chronological order from the frame number “1F”. At this time, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) has already been displayed in a varying manner, and the effect related to the consumption marker related to the variation display of the special symbol (the reserved marker movement effect, the consumption marker rotation effect). The explanation will be made on the assumption that is finished (hidden).

  Frame number “1F”: When a game ball enters (wins) the upper start winning opening 26, the working memory of the first special symbol increases by one, and the marker material number is added to “first special symbol first”. The marker image “1” is displayed (selected). That is, it represents that an effect in which a white marker image of the marker material number “1” appears on the rightmost pedestal MDA is executed.

  Frame numbers “2F” to “4F”: Marker images with marker material numbers “2” to “4” are displayed (selected) in “first special symbol 1st”, respectively. That is, it represents that the reserved marker rotation effect in which the white marker images of the marker material numbers “2” to “4” are sequentially displayed on the rightmost base MDA is executed.

  Frame number “5F”: A marker image with a marker material number “5” is displayed (selected) in “first special symbol 1st”. That is, it represents that a reserved marker rotation effect is executed in which a white marker image of the marker material number “5” is displayed on the rightmost base MDA.

  In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the upper start winning opening 26, the working memory of the first special symbol is further increased by one (two in total), and the marker “second first special symbol” is marked. The marker image with the material number “5” is displayed (selected). That is, it represents that an effect in which a white marker image with the marker material number “5” appears on the second pedestal MDA from the right is executed.

  Therefore, since the marker material number of “first special symbol first” and “first special symbol second” is the same “5”, the marker image corresponding to the first of the first special symbol This represents that the second marker image of the new first special symbol is displayed (selected) in synchronization with the display.

  Frame number “6F”: Marker image of marker material number “6” is displayed (selected) in “first special symbol first” and “first special symbol second”. That is, it represents that the reserved marker rotation effect in which the white marker image of the marker material number “6” is displayed on the right end and the second pedestal MDA from the right is executed.

  Accordingly, since the marker material number of the “first special symbol first” and the “first special symbol second” is the same “6”, the marker image corresponding to the first of the first special symbol This indicates that the display of the second marker image of the new first special symbol is changed in synchronization with the change of the display.

  Frame number “7F”: The marker image of the marker material number “7” is displayed (selected) in “first special symbol first” and “first special symbol second”. That is, it represents that the reserved marker rotation effect in which the white marker image of the marker material number “7” is displayed on the right end and the second pedestal MDA from the right is executed.

  In addition, when a game ball enters (wins) the lower start winning opening 28a, the working memory of the second special symbol increases by one, and the marker material number “7” is added to the “second special symbol first”. A marker image is displayed (selected). That is, it represents that an effect in which a gray marker image of the marker material number “7” appears on the leftmost pedestal MDB is executed.

  Therefore, since the marker material number of “first special symbol first”, “first special symbol second” and “second special symbol first” is the same “7”, the first special symbol of This indicates that the first marker image of the new second special symbol is displayed (selected) in synchronization with the display of the marker images corresponding to the first and second.

  Frame number “8F”: Marker image of marker material number “8” is displayed on “first special symbol first”, “first special symbol second”, and “second special symbol first” ( Selected). That is, a white marker image with a marker material number “8” is displayed on the rightmost and second pedestal MDA from the right, and a gray marker image with a marker material number “8” is displayed on the leftmost pedestal MDB. It represents that the reserved marker rotation effect is executed.

  Therefore, since the marker material number of “first special symbol first”, “first special symbol second”, and “second special symbol first” is the same “8”, the first special symbol This indicates that all changes in the display of the marker images corresponding to the first, second and second special symbols of the symbol are performed in synchronization. That is, the animation by the marker image of the special symbol being displayed is all executed synchronously by using the same marker material number.

  Frame number “9F”: Marker image of marker material number “9” is displayed in “first special symbol first”, “first special symbol second”, and “second special symbol first” ( Selected). That is, a white marker image with a marker material number “9” is displayed on the rightmost and second pedestal MDA from the right, and a gray marker image with a marker material number “9” is displayed on the leftmost pedestal MDB. It represents that the reserved marker rotation effect is executed.

  In addition, when a game ball enters (wins) at the upper start winning opening 26, the working memory of the first special symbol is further increased by one (total of three), and the marker “first special symbol third” is marked. The marker image of material number “9” is displayed (selected). That is, it represents that an effect in which a white marker image with the marker material number “9” appears on the third pedestal MDA from the right is executed.

  Frame numbers “9F” to “12F”: “first special symbol first”, “first special symbol second”, “first special symbol third”, and “second special symbol first” The marker images of the marker material numbers “9”, “10”, “1”, “2” are displayed (selected). That is, white marker images of marker material numbers “9”, “10”, “1”, and “2” are sequentially displayed on the first, second, and third pedestal MDA from the right, and are displayed on the leftmost pedestal MDB. This represents that a pending marker rotation effect is executed in which gray marker images of marker material numbers “9”, “10”, “1”, and “2” are sequentially displayed.

  In addition, in the frame number “12F”, when the game ball enters (wins) in the lower start winning opening 28a, the operation memory of the second special symbol is further increased by one (two in total). The marker image of the marker material number “2” is displayed (selected) in the “special symbol second”. That is, it represents that an effect in which a gray marker image with the marker material number “2” appears on the second base MDB from the left is executed.

  Frame numbers “13F”, “14F”: “first special symbol first”, “first special symbol second”, “first special symbol third”, “second special symbol first”, In addition, the marker images of the marker material numbers “3” and “4” are displayed (selected) in the “second special symbol second”. That is, white marker images of marker material numbers “3” and “4” are sequentially displayed on the first, second, and third pedestal MDA from the right, respectively, and the marker material number is displayed on the first, second pedestal MDB from the left. This represents that a reserved marker rotation effect in which gray marker images “3” and “4” are sequentially displayed is executed.

  In addition, in the frame number “14F”, when the game ball enters (wins) the upper start winning opening 26, the operation memory of the first special symbol is further increased by 1 (total of 4). The marker image of the marker material number “4” is displayed (selected) in the “special pattern fourth”. That is, it represents that an effect in which a white marker image of the marker material number “4” appears on the fourth pedestal MDA from the right is executed.

  Frame numbers “15F” to “17F”: “first special symbol first” to “first special symbol fourth”, “second special symbol first”, and “second special symbol second” The marker images of the marker material numbers “5” to “7” are displayed (selected). That is, white marker images of marker material numbers “5” to “7” are sequentially displayed on all pedestal MDA, and marker material numbers “5” to “7” are displayed on the first and second pedestal MDBs from the left. "Represents a reserved marker rotation effect in which gray marker images of" are sequentially displayed.

  In addition, in the frame number “17F”, when the game ball enters (wins) the lower start winning opening 28a, the operation memory of the second special symbol is further increased by one (a total of three). The marker image of the marker material number “7” is displayed (selected) on the “special symbol third”. That is, it represents that an effect in which a gray marker image of the marker material number “7” appears on the third base MDB from the left is executed.

  Frame numbers “18F” to “22F”: “first special symbol first” to “first special symbol fourth”, “second special symbol first”, “second special symbol second”, In addition, marker images of the marker material numbers “8” to “10”, “1”, and “2” are displayed (selected) in the “second special symbol third”. That is, the white marker images of the marker material numbers “8” to “10”, “1”, and “2” are sequentially displayed on all the pedestals MDA, and the first, second, and third pedestal MDBs from the left are displayed. This indicates that the reserved marker rotation effect is executed in which the gray marker images of the marker material numbers “8” to “10”, “1”, and “2” are sequentially displayed.

  In addition, in the frame number “22F”, when the game ball enters (wins) the lower start winning opening 28a, the operation memory of the second special symbol is further increased by one (four in total). The marker image of the marker material number “2” is displayed (selected) on the “special symbol 4th”. That is, it represents that an effect in which a gray marker image with the marker material number “2” appears on the fourth base MDB from the left is executed.

  Frame number “23F”: Marker material number for “first special symbol first” to “first special symbol fourth”, “second special symbol first” to “second special symbol fourth” Marker images “3” to “3” are displayed (selected). That is, the white marker images with the marker material numbers “3” to “3” are sequentially displayed on all the pedestals MDA, and the gray marker images with the marker material numbers “3” to “3” are sequentially displayed on all the pedestals MDB. This indicates that a marker rotation effect is executed.

  Thus, when a new special symbol working memory is added when there is no special symbol working memory, the marker marker number “1” selected marker image is displayed. Is executed. Then, as the marker material number is sequentially changed as “2”, “3”,... With the passage of time, the animation becomes as if the coin is rotating, and the holding marker rotation effect is realized. And, when a special symbol working memory exists, that is, when a holding marker rotation effect is executed, if a new special symbol working memory is added, the same marker as the changed marker image An on-hold marker appearance effect is displayed in which the marker image with the material number selected is newly displayed. Therefore, it represents that a marker image of a new special symbol is displayed (selected) in synchronization with the display of the marker image corresponding to the special symbol for which the reserved marker rotation effect is being executed. There is no distinction in the type of special symbol and the number of operating memories thereof, and a new marker image of the first special symbol is displayed (selected) in synchronization with the display of the marker image corresponding to the first special symbol, or a new The second special symbol marker image is displayed (selected). Similarly, in synchronization with the display of the marker image corresponding to the second special symbol, a marker image of a new first special symbol is displayed (selected) or a marker image of a new second special symbol is displayed (selected). It represents being done.

  Therefore, by making the marker images used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol similar and making the number of the marker images the same, it is more synchronous than performing each animation independently. Animation can be performed, and visibility and animation expression can be improved. In addition, by arranging the first special symbol on the left side and the second special symbol on the right side from the center of the lower part of the screen and making it look symmetrical, and performing animation synchronously, further visibility and animation expression can be achieved. Can be improved.

  Next, a marker image (marker material number) to be set (selected) at the time of the pending marker movement effect and the consumed marker rotation effect in the above process will be described in time series. Specifically, the marker material number that will be selected when the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is displayed, the next variation is possible, and the special symbol working memory is consumed. Will be described in time series.

[Marker material number setting example (2)]
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a setting example of marker material numbers (part 2). Specific contents will be described below. The "frame number", "first special symbol 1st" to "first special symbol 4th", "second special symbol 1st" to "second special symbol" shown in each stage. The contents indicated by the “fourth” and “consumption marker” are the same as the contents described in the marker material number setting example (part 1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Frame numbers “1F” to “4F”: “first special symbol first” to “first special symbol fourth”, “second special symbol first”, “second special symbol second”, In addition, the marker images of the marker material numbers “1” to “4” are displayed (selected) in the “second special symbol third”. That is, the marker material numbers “1” to “4” are sequentially displayed on all the pedestals MDA, respectively, and the marker material number “1” is displayed on the first, second, and third pedestal MDBs from the left. This represents that the reserved marker rotation effect in which the gray marker images of “4” are sequentially displayed is executed.

  Frame number “5F”: Marker image with marker material number “5” is displayed (selected) in “consumption marker”. That is, it indicates that the special symbol working memory has been consumed. In addition, since the marker material number of “second special symbol third” is not selected, it indicates that the working memory of the second special symbol is consumed. Therefore, it represents that the holding marker movement effect in which the gray marker image corresponding to the second special symbol of the marker material number “5” is displayed on the base HA is executed.

  In addition, the marker material number “1st special design 1st” to “first special design 4th”, “second special design 1st”, and “second special design 2nd” 5 ”marker image is displayed (selected). That is, the reserved marker rotation effect is displayed in which the white marker image of the marker material number “5” is displayed on all the pedestals MDA, and the marker material number “5” is displayed on the first and second pedestals MDB from the left. This represents that a reserved marker movement effect is displayed in which a gray marker image is displayed.

  Accordingly, the marker material numbers of “first special symbol first” to “first special symbol fourth”, “second special symbol first”, “second special symbol first”, “consumption marker” Are the same “5”, so the first to fourth of the first special symbol, the first and second of the second special symbol, and the display of the marker image corresponding to the consumption marker are all synchronized. Represents what is done. That is, the displayed special symbol and the marker image of the consumption marker are all displayed in synchronization with the same marker material number.

  Frame numbers “6F” to “14F”: “first special symbol first” to “first special symbol fourth”, “second special symbol first”, “second special symbol second”, In addition, marker images of marker material numbers “6” to “10” and “1” to “4” are displayed (selected) in “consumption marker”. That is, white marker images of marker material numbers “6” to “10” and “1” to “4” are sequentially displayed on all the pedestal MDA, respectively, and the marker is displayed on the first and second pedestal MDB from the left. The reserved marker rotation effect in which the gray marker images of the material numbers “6” to “10” and “1” to “4” are sequentially displayed, and the marker material numbers “6” to “10” and “1” on the base HA. "-" Represents a consumption marker rotation effect in which gray marker images of "4" are sequentially displayed.

  Accordingly, the marker material numbers of “first special symbol first” to “first special symbol fourth”, “second special symbol first”, “second special symbol first”, “consumption marker” Are the same “6” to “10”, “1” to “4”, so that the first to fourth of the first special symbol, the first, second and second of the second special symbol, and This indicates that all changes in the display of the marker image corresponding to the consumption marker are performed in synchronization. That is, the animation by the marker image of the displayed special symbol and the consumption marker is all executed synchronously by using the same marker material number.

  Frame number “15F”: Marker material number of “consumption marker” is not selected. That is, it represents that the consumption marker rotation effect performed over the frame numbers “5F” to “14F” has ended after the lapse of the specified time.

  In addition, the marker material number “1st special design 1st” to “first special design 4th”, “second special design 1st”, and “second special design 2nd” 5 ”marker image is displayed (selected). That is, the reserved marker rotation effect is displayed in which the white marker image of the marker material number “5” is displayed on all the pedestals MDA, and the marker material number “5” is displayed on the first and second pedestals MDB from the left. This represents that the reserved marker rotation effect in which the gray marker image is displayed is executed.

  Frame numbers “16F” to “19F”: “first special symbol first” to “first special symbol fourth”, “second special symbol first”, and “second special symbol second” The marker images of the marker material numbers “6” to “9” are displayed (selected). That is, white marker images of marker material numbers “6” to “9” are sequentially displayed on all pedestal MDA, and marker material numbers “6” to “9” are displayed on the first and second pedestal MDBs from the left. "Represents a reserved marker rotation effect in which gray marker images of" are sequentially displayed.

  Frame number “20F”: When a game ball enters (wins) the lower start winning opening 28a, the working memory of the second special symbol increases by one (a total of three), and “second special symbol third” The marker image with the marker material number “10” is displayed (selected). That is, it represents that an effect in which a gray marker image of the marker material number “10” appears on the leftmost pedestal MDB is executed.

  In addition, the marker material number “10” is added to “first special symbol first” to “first special symbol fourth”, “second special symbol first”, and “second special symbol second”. The marker image is displayed (selected). That is, a white marker image with a marker material number “10” is displayed on all pedestals MDA, and a gray marker image with a marker material number “10” is displayed on the first and second pedestals MDB from the left. This means that the reserved marker rotation effect is executed.

  Frame number “21F” ˜: “First special symbol first” to “first special symbol fourth”, “second special symbol first”, “second special symbol second”, and , Marker images of the marker material numbers “1” to “2” are displayed (selected) in the “second special symbol third”. That is, white marker images having marker material numbers “1” to “1” are sequentially displayed on all the pedestals MDA, and grays having marker material numbers “1” to “1” are displayed on the first, second, and third pedestals MDB from the left. This represents that the reserved marker rotation effect in which the marker images are sequentially displayed is executed.

  In this way, when the working memory of a special symbol is consumed, the marker image with the marker material number at the time of consumption is selected is displayed as a consumption marker, and the marker image that has been displayed so far is not displayed. A marker movement effect is executed. In addition, when there are a plurality of operation memories at that time, a pending marker movement effect is also performed in which a new marker image moves to the position of the marker image that is not displayed. Then, the marker image of the special symbol and the consumption marker image are sequentially changed with the same marker material number as time passes, so that the animation is as if the coin is rotating, and the reserved marker rotation effect and the consumption marker rotation effect Are executed synchronously.

  Therefore, by making the marker images used in the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the consumption marker similar and making the number of the marker images the same, each of them can be independently animated. The animation can be performed synchronously, and the visibility and the expression of the animation can be improved. In addition, the first special symbol on the left side from the center of the lower part of the screen, the second special symbol on the right side, and the consumption marker in the center are arranged in a symmetrical manner, and animation is performed in synchronization, thereby further improving the visibility. And the animation expression can be improved.

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is selected as a jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 16) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or produces an effect pattern for the notice effect (reach occurrence other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Select a previous notice pattern, a notice pattern after reach, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The effect control CPU 126 executes processing related to password input and two-dimensional code issuance during demonstration effect control. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means). However, in the present embodiment, at the time of a small hit, the stop display effect is executed in a manner similar to or approximated to a loss.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit (special game effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content (effect pattern) of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). For example, in the case of a probable big hit with 16 rounds, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 16-round prominent effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and this effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). To direct. As a result, the image of the big hit effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process (standby state effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern includes the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. For example, an image for password input guidance is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, or a code issuance is performed. The menu screen is displayed (not shown).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 39) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 39). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule (change time, reach type and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, stop display The mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but when it corresponds to 7 round big hit or 16 round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. Note that, in the big hit effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched for each big hit stop symbol.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of losing is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, and reach occurrence) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.).

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes stage management processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes specific processes related to the stage (mode, zone). Stage effects are executed using a plurality of background images (for example, “daytime stage”, “night stage”, etc.), and if a predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied during execution of the stage effects, the stage image is changed to change the stage. Production is performed.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 48), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (as various effect execution means). Function), a notice effect is executed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

  The present invention can be implemented with various modifications without being limited to the above-described embodiment (hereinafter referred to as the first embodiment). Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, when the operation memory of the special symbol is consumed, that is, when the reserved marker movement effect is produced, the values of the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol and the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol are referred to. The same value as the suspended marker counter with reference to the value of the consumption marker counter was set. Here, when the operation memory of the first special symbol is newly added during the consumption marker rotation effect, that is, when the reserved marker appearance effect is executed during the consumption marker rotation effect, the first special symbol The value of the reserved marker counter and the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol are set to “1”, and the value of the consumed marker counter is referred to and is not set to the same value as the consumed marker counter. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the animation in the consumption marker rotation effect and the animation in the hold marker appearance effect are synchronized. Specific contents will be described.

  FIG. 50 is a continuous diagram illustrating an example of the effect image corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol of the second embodiment. Here, an example of an effect performed when a special symbol operation memory is newly added during a consumption marker rotation effect without a special symbol operation memory is shown.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 50 (A): When the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied, since there is one operation memory corresponding to the first special symbol, the operation memory is stored. Are displayed in the order (oldest order) and the next variable display of the first special symbol is started.

[Pending marker movement effect]
With the start of variation, all of the left, middle, and right effect symbols have begun to display variation. Further, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol is decreased by one as the change starts, the display number of the white marker MA5 is decreased by one in conjunction therewith. For example, there was one working memory so far, but the oldest (old) white marker Mw displayed on the pedestal MDA is shifted to the changing area HA and consumed by internal lottery. The production will be performed together. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the working memory is consumed with respect to the first special symbol even in the production. The consumption marker HM5 that has moved to the changing area HA has the same shape as the white marker MA5 before the movement (the shape of the coin viewed obliquely) (fifth stage). That is, the marker image of the first special symbol and the marker image of the consumption marker are synchronized. In this way, by performing the animation in synchronization, it is possible to improve visibility and animation expression.

[Left design stop]
(B) in FIG. 50: For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “0” is stopped on the screen.

[Consumption marker rotation effect]
In addition, the consumption marker HM5 on the changing area HA is replaced with another image, and is changed to a consumption marker HM7 that is a marker image of a shape (seventh step) when the coin is viewed obliquely. Note that there is a consumption marker HM6 (a marker image of the shape of the coin viewed from the side (sixth stage)) before the change from the consumption marker HM5 to the marker image of HM7, and the coin is rotating. A series of scenes are represented by animation.

[On-hold marker appearance effect]
In addition, since the winning at the lower start winning opening 28a occurs, one working memory corresponding to the second special symbol is generated, and the first working memory exists at the left end position on the base MDB at the bottom of the screen. Is newly displayed (stored number display effect executing means). Here, a gray marker MB7, which is a marker image having the same shape as the consumption marker image, that is, a shape when the coin is viewed obliquely (seventh stage) is displayed as the marker image. Therefore, it is indicated that the marker material number “7” of the second special symbol is selected in synchronization with the marker material number “7” of the marker image corresponding to the consumption marker, and the marker image MB7 corresponding to the marker material number “7” is displayed. ing.

[Right production symbol stop]
(C) in FIG. 50: Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “6” is stopped on the screen.

[Hold marker rotation effect]
Further, with the passage of time, the gray marker MB7 of the second special symbol is replaced with another image, and the coin is changed to a gray marker MB9 which is a marker image having a shape (9th stage) when the coin is viewed obliquely. . Note that there is a gray marker MB8 (a marker image in the shape of the coin as viewed obliquely (eighth stage)) before the second special symbol gray marker MB7 is changed to a marker image of MB9. A series of scenes in which coins are rotating are shown in animation.

[Consumption marker non-display effect]
In addition, the consumption marker on the changing area HA is replaced with another image, and is changed to a consumption marker HM9 which is a marker image having a shape when the coin is viewed obliquely (9th stage). Note that there is a consumption marker HM8 (a marker image in the shape of the coin viewed from an oblique side (eighth stage)) before the consumption marker HM7 is changed to the marker image of HM9, and the coin is further rotated. This is represented by a series of animations. When the consumption marker HM9 is changed, the consumption marker rotation effect is hidden on the changing area HA for a certain time (for example, about 1 to 2 seconds), and the consumption marker image is deleted. The

[On-hold marker appearance effect]
In addition, as a result of the winning at the upper start winning opening 26, one operation memory corresponding to the first special symbol is generated, and one operation memory is located at the right end (top) on the base MDA at the bottom of the screen. A marker image representing the presence of eyes is newly displayed (stored number display effect executing means). Here, a white marker MA9, which is a marker image having the same shape as the marker image of the second special symbol, that is, the shape of the coin viewed obliquely (9th stage) is displayed as the marker image. Therefore, the marker material number “9” of the first special symbol is selected in synchronization with the marker material number “9” of the gray marker image MB9 of the second special symbol, and the corresponding white marker image MA9 is displayed. It is expressed.

  In this way, when the operation memory of the first special symbol is newly added during the consumption marker rotation effect in the state where the operation memory of the special symbol does not exist, the animation in the consumption marker rotation effect and the reserved marker appearance effect, And since it can synchronize with the animation in the subsequent holding marker rotation effect, visibility and the expression of animation can be improved.

[Production control method of the second embodiment]
Next, an effect control method performed by the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the control method similar to 1st Embodiment, and it is concrete about the control processing about the holding marker appearance effect in the 2nd embodiment, a holding marker rotation effect, a holding marker movement effect, and a consumption marker rotation effect. explain.

[Production selection process when the number of working memories increases in the second embodiment]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of an effect selection process for increasing the number of working memories according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example. The control similar to that of the first embodiment will be briefly described.

  Step S461: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect command analysis processing when the number of working memories increases. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 corresponds to which special symbol the effect command at the time of increasing the number of operating memories received in the previous process (step S450 in the operation memory effect management process: FIG. 40) corresponds to Confirm the number corresponding to the working memory. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S462.

  Step S462: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the number of working memories is the first. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the type of the working memory number analyzed in the previous process (step S461) is “first”. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the number of working memories is the first (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S466. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the number of working memories is not the first (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S464.

  Step S464: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the value of the reserved marker counter corresponding to the special symbol type analyzed in the previous process (step S461). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S480.

  Step S466: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the reserved marker counter of another special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the value of the pending marker counter corresponding to a type different from the type of the special symbol analyzed in the previous process (step S461). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S468.

  Step S468: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the holding marker counter of another special symbol is larger than zero. Specifically, the value of the reserved marker counter of another special symbol referred to in the previous process (step S466) is compared with “0” to check whether the value of the reserved marker counter is large. As a result of this confirmation, if the value of the holding marker counter of another special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S470. On the other hand, when the value of the holding marker counter of another special symbol is not larger than 0 (No), the presentation control CPU 126 next executes step S471.

  Step S470: The effect control CPU 126 sets the holding marker counter of the target special symbol to be the same. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130, sets the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol to the same value as the value of the reserved marker counter of another special symbol, and stores it. In addition, when the operation memory of the target special symbol is the first (step S462: Yes), since the value of the holding marker counter of the target special symbol is 0, this process allows another special symbol to be stored. This indicates that the value is changed to the value of the holding marker counter (any one of 1 to 10). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S480.

  Step S471: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the consumption marker counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the stored value of the consumption marker counter. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S472.

  Step S472: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the consumption marker counter is greater than zero. Specifically, the value of the consumption marker counter referred to in the previous process (step S471) is compared with “0” to check whether the value of the consumption marker counter is large. As a result of this confirmation, when the value of the consumption marker counter is greater than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S473. On the other hand, when the value of the consumption marker counter is not greater than 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S475.

  Note that the value of the consumption marker counter being greater than 0 indicates that the consumption marker rotation effect is being executed, and that the value of 0 indicates that the consumption marker rotation effect is not being executed. Therefore, in this process, it may be confirmed whether or not the consumption marker rotation effect is being executed. As a result of the confirmation, if the consumption marker rotation effect is being executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S473, and if the consumption marker rotation effect is not being executed (No), the effect control CPU 126. May then execute step S475.

  Step S473: The effect control CPU 126 sets the holding marker counter of the target special symbol to be the same. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130, sets the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol to the same value as the value of the consumption marker counter, and stores it.

  For example, assuming that the target special symbol is “first special symbol” and the consumption marker counter value is “7”, the effect control CPU 126 sets the value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol to “7”. And stored in the counter buffer area of the RAM 130. In addition, assuming that the target special symbol is “second special symbol” and the value of the consumption marker counter is “3”, the production control CPU 126 sets the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol to “3”. It is set and stored in the counter buffer area of the RAM 130.

  As described above, when the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol is set to the same value as the value of the consumption marker counter, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S480.

  Step S475: The effect control CPU 126 sets the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol to “1”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and sets the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol to “1” and stores it. When the operation memory of the target special symbol is the first (step S462: Yes), the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol is 0, and the value of the reserved marker counter of another special symbol is 0. 0 (step S468: No), and further, since the value of the consumption marker counter is 0 (step S472: No), there is no working memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, Furthermore, it represents that the consumption marker rotation effect is not executed. Therefore, “1” is set as the value of the reserved marker counter of the special symbol of the first target.

  For example, assuming that the target special symbol is “first special symbol”, the effect control CPU 126 sets the value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol to “1” and stores it in the counter buffer area of the RAM 130. In addition, assuming that the target special symbol is “second special symbol”, the effect control CPU 126 sets the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol to “1” and stores it in the counter buffer area of the RAM 130. To do.

  Step S480: The effect control CPU 126 executes an execution setting process for the reserved marker appearance effect of the target special symbol. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 is referred to in the previous process (step S464, step S470, step S473, or step S475) or based on the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol set, Set to execute the reserved marker appearance effect of the target special symbol. For example, a marker image corresponding to the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol is selected, and a setting for executing an effect of causing the selected marker image to appear (display) at a predetermined location in the display screen is performed.

  As described above, the value of the reserved marker counter of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is “0” (the state in which no special symbol working memory exists), and the consumption marker counter is “ In a state larger than “0” (consumed marker rotation effected state), the value of the pending marker counter is set to be the same as the value of the consumed marker counter. Therefore, when the operation memory of the first special symbol is newly added during the consumption marker rotation effect in a state where the operation memory of the special symbol does not exist, the animation in the consumption marker rotation effect and the reserved marker appearance effect, and Since it can synchronize with the animation in the subsequent holding marker rotation effect, visibility and animation expression can be improved.

  Next, the marker images (marker material numbers) that are set (selected) at the time of the hold marker movement effect, the consumption marker rotation effect, and the hold marker rotation effect in the above processing will be described in time series. Specifically, the marker material number to be selected when the first special symbol operation memory is newly added during the consumption marker rotation effect in the absence of the special symbol operation memory. Explain in series.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of marker material numbers according to the second embodiment. Specific contents will be described below. The "frame number", "first special symbol 1st" to "first special symbol 4th", "second special symbol 1st" to "second special symbol" shown in each stage. The contents indicated by the “fourth” and “consumption marker” are the same as the contents described in the marker material number setting examples (part 1) and (part 2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Frame numbers “1F” to “3F”: Marker images with marker material numbers “1” to “3” are displayed (selected) in “first first special symbol”. That is, during the change display (“1F”, “2F”) and stop display (“3F”) of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the marker material number “1” on the rightmost base MDA. This represents that the reserved marker rotation effect in which the white marker images of “3” are sequentially displayed is executed.

  Frame number “4F”: Marker image with marker material number “4” is displayed (selected) in “consumption marker”. That is, it indicates that the special symbol working memory has been consumed. In addition, since the marker material number of “first special symbol first” is not selected, it indicates that the working memory of the first special symbol is consumed. Therefore, it represents that the holding marker movement effect is displayed in which the white marker image corresponding to the first special symbol of the marker material number “4” is displayed on the base HA.

  Frame numbers “5F” to “8F”: Marker images with marker material numbers “5” to “8” are displayed (selected) in “consumption marker”. That is, the consumption marker rotation effect in which white marker images of the marker material numbers “5” to “8” are sequentially displayed on the base HA is executed.

  Frame number “9F”: The marker image with the marker material number “9” is displayed (selected) in “consumption marker”. That is, the consumption marker rotation effect in which the white marker image of the marker material number “9” is displayed on the pedestal HA is executed.

  In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the upper start winning opening 26, the working memory of the first special symbol increases by one (1 in total), and the marker material is added to the first special symbol first. The marker image with the number “9” is displayed (selected). That is, it represents that an effect in which a white marker image with the marker material number “9” appears on the rightmost pedestal MDA is executed.

  Accordingly, since the marker material number of “first special symbol first” and “consumption marker” is the same “9”, a new first special symbol is synchronized with the display of the marker image corresponding to the consumption marker. This shows that the first marker image is displayed (selected).

  Frame numbers “10F” to “13F”: Marker images with marker material numbers “10” and “1” to “3” are displayed (selected) in “first special symbol 1st” and “consumed marker”. The In other words, the reserved marker rotation effect in which the white marker images of the marker material numbers “10” and “1” to “3” are sequentially displayed on the rightmost pedestal MDA is executed, and the marker material number “10” is displayed on the pedestal HA. ", A consumption marker rotation effect in which white marker images of" 1 "to" 3 "are sequentially displayed is executed.

  In addition, in the frame number “13F”, when a game ball enters (wins) the lower start winning opening 28a, the working memory of the second special symbol increases by one (one in total), and “second special” The marker image of the marker material number “3” is displayed (selected) on the “first pattern”. That is, it represents that an effect in which a gray marker image of the marker material number “3” appears on the leftmost pedestal MDB is executed.

  Accordingly, since the marker material numbers of “first special symbol first”, “second special symbol first”, and “consumption marker” are the same “3”, the holding marker of the first special symbol and This indicates that the first marker image of the new second special symbol is displayed (selected) in synchronization with the display of the marker image corresponding to the consumption marker.

  Frame number “14F”: A marker image of the marker material number “4” is displayed (selected) in “first special symbol first,“ second special symbol first ”, and“ consumed marker ”. That is, a reserved marker rotation effect in which a white marker image with a marker material number “4” is displayed on the rightmost pedestal MDA, and a gray marker image with a marker material number “4” is displayed on the leftmost pedestal MDB; This represents that a consumption marker rotation effect in which a gray marker image of the marker material number “4” is displayed on the pedestal HA is executed.

  Accordingly, since the marker material numbers of “first special symbol first”, “second special symbol first”, and “consumption marker” are the same “4”, the first special symbol first, The first special symbol of 2 special symbols and the display change of the marker image corresponding to the consumption marker are all performed synchronously. That is, the animation by the marker image of the displayed special symbol and the consumption marker is all executed synchronously by using the same marker material number.

  Frame number “15F”: Marker material number of “consumption marker” is not selected. That is, it represents that the consumption marker rotation effect performed over the frame numbers “4F” to “14F” has ended after the lapse of the specified time.

  In addition, the marker image of the marker material number “5” is displayed (selected) on the other “first special symbol first” and “second special symbol first”. In other words, the reserved marker rotation effect is executed in which the white marker image with the marker material number “5” is displayed on the rightmost pedestal MDA and the gray marker image with the marker material number “5” is displayed on the leftmost pedestal MDB. Represents that

  Frame numbers “16F” to “18F”: Marker images of marker material numbers “6” to “8” are displayed (selected) on “first special symbol first” and “second special symbol first”. Is done. That is, white marker images with marker material numbers “6” to “8” are displayed on the rightmost pedestal MDA, and gray marker images with marker material numbers “6” to “8” are displayed on the leftmost pedestal MDB. This indicates that the reserved marker rotation effect is executed.

  In addition, in the frame number “18F”, when a game ball enters (wins) the upper start winning opening 26, the operation memory of the first special symbol is further increased by 1 (two in total). The marker image of the marker material number “8” is displayed (selected) in the “special symbol second”. That is, it represents that the effect that the white marker image of the marker material number “8” appears on the second base MDB from the left is executed.

  Frame numbers “19F” to “23F”: “first special symbol first”, “first special symbol second”, and “second special symbol first” and marker material numbers “9”, “ Marker images “10”, “1” to “3” are displayed (selected). That is, white marker images of marker material numbers “9”, “10”, “1” to “3” are sequentially displayed on the first and second pedestal MDA from the right, respectively, and the marker on the leftmost pedestal MDB. This represents that a reserved marker rotation effect is executed in which gray marker images of material numbers “9”, “10”, “1” to “3” are sequentially displayed.

  In this way, when the operation memory of a special symbol that has existed only one is consumed and the consumption marker effect is executed, when the operation memory of a new special symbol is added, the marker material number of the consumption marker A pending marker appearance effect is executed in which the same marker image is displayed. Then, the marker image of the special symbol and the consumption marker image are sequentially changed with the same marker material number as time passes, so that the animation is as if the coin is rotating, and the reserved marker rotation effect and the consumption marker rotation effect Are executed synchronously.

  Therefore, by making the marker images used in the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the consumption marker similar and making the number of the marker images the same, each of them can be independently animated. The animation can be performed synchronously, and the visibility and the expression of the animation can be improved. In addition, the first special symbol on the left side from the center of the lower part of the screen, the second special symbol on the right side, and the consumption marker in the center are arranged in a symmetrical manner, and animation is performed in synchronization, thereby further improving the visibility. And the animation expression can be improved.

[Third Embodiment]
The base image bases HMA, HMB, HA used in the first embodiment, white marker images MA1 to MA10 corresponding to the first special symbol, gray marker images MB1 to MB10 corresponding to the second special symbol, and the like are examples. Yes, the base image and the marker image may be changed to display modes other than these. Specific contents will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Correspondence table of marker material numbers and special symbol markers in the third embodiment]
FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a correspondence table of marker material numbers and special symbol markers according to the third embodiment. Specific contents will be described below. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the content similar to the marker raw material number of 1st Embodiment, and the correspondence table | surface (FIG. 42) of each special symbol marker.

  This correspondence table is a table for associating marker images, which are materials used for production related to the reserved markers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and marker material numbers, which are numbers for identifying the marker images. . The marker material number corresponds to the value of the holding marker counter or a consumption marker counter described later. The reserved marker of the first special symbol is composed of 10 types of marker images having different shapes, and the reserved marker of the second special symbol is similarly configured of 10 types of marker images having different shapes. The marker image of the first special symbol has a shape with different angles for viewing the coins, and the marker image of the second special symbol has a shape with different angles for viewing the rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the marker material number is sequentially changed, the first special symbol indicates that the animation is as if the coin is rotating, and for the second special symbol, the rectangular parallelepiped rotates. It represents an animation that looks like Note that the marker image of the first special symbol and the marker image of the second special symbol corresponding to each marker material number are formed with the same viewing angle.

  In addition, using the holding marker image shown in the correspondence table, effects related to the holding marker and the consumption marker (holding marker appearance effect, holding marker movement effect, holding marker rotation effect, and consumption marker rotation effect), that is, , Representing the animation to be performed. For example, when the value of the pending marker counter is “7”, this indicates that the marker image with the marker material number “7” is selected. Therefore, the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol, the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol, and the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol are all processed with the same value, so that whenever an animation is executed, Since the same marker material number is sequentially selected, it becomes an animation as if a coin or a rectangular parallelepiped is rotating at the same angle, indicating that the holding marker rotation effect and the consumption marker rotation effect are executed in synchronization. .

  In this way, even if the shape of the marker image is a coin or a rectangular parallelepiped, the number of the marker images is made the same, and the shape type (viewing angle) and the like are made similar to each other so that the animation can be independently performed. Rather than doing this, the animation can be performed synchronously, and visibility and animation expression can be improved. In addition, the first special symbol on the left side from the center of the lower part of the screen, the second special symbol on the right side, and the consumption marker in the center are arranged in a symmetrical manner, and animation is performed in synchronization, thereby further improving the visibility. And the animation expression can be improved.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, when the value of the reserved marker counter of the special symbol is set once (any one of “1” to “10”), it is updated until the value of the reserved marker counter of the special symbol becomes “0”. I just did. In the fourth embodiment, control for monitoring the value of the holding marker counter of each special symbol is further added, and specific contents will be described.

[Working Memory Production Management Process of Fourth Embodiment]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example. Note that description of the same control content as in the first embodiment is omitted.

  Step S450: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. As a result of the confirmation, when the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S452. On the other hand, when the effect command at the time of increase in the number of working memories has not been received (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S454.

  Step S452: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern for displaying a marker image corresponding to the increased total stored number. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S454.

  Step S454: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories is decreased is received from the main control CPU 72. As a result of this confirmation, when the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S456. On the other hand, when the production command when the number of working memories is decreased has not been received (No), the production control CPU 126 next executes step S458.

  Step S456: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, an effect pattern (marker image shift display pattern) for displaying a marker image corresponding to the total stored number after reduction is selected. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S458.

  Step S458: The effect control CPU 126 executes a pending marker counter monitoring process. Specifically, when the value of the reserved marker counter of the special symbol is larger than 0, the production control CPU 126 checks whether or not it is the same as the value of the reserved marker counter of another special symbol. Set. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S460.

  Step S460: The effect control CPU 126 executes a pending marker effect setting process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 sets execution of the reserved marker rotation effect. For example, by setting a marker image to be displayed at the time of processing, the marker image of the first special symbol is changed from the white marker MA1 to MA2, thereby realizing an animation in which a coin rotates. Further, when there is an operation memory of the first special symbol and an operation memory of the second special symbol and each marker image is displayed, a process of synchronizing them is also executed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S485.

  Step S485: The effect control CPU 126 executes a consumption marker effect setting process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 sets execution of the consumption marker rotation effect. For example, by setting a marker image to be displayed at the time of processing, the marker image is changed from the marker MH3 to MH4, thereby realizing an animation in which a coin rotates. Moreover, the process which synchronizes the marker image of the operation | movement memory of the special symbol before moving and the marker image of a consumption marker is also performed.

  When the above procedure is executed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 39).

[Pending Marker Counter Monitoring Processing of Fourth Embodiment]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the pending marker counter monitoring process according to the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the stored marker counter value corresponding to the first special symbol stored therein. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S902.

  Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol is greater than zero. Specifically, the value of the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol referred to in the previous process (step S900) is compared with “0” to check whether the value of the reserved marker counter is large. As a result of the confirmation, if the value of the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S904. On the other hand, when the value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol is not greater than 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the action memory effect management process (FIG. 54).

  Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the stored marker counter value corresponding to the stored second special symbol. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S906.

  Step S906: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol is greater than zero. Specifically, the value of the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol referred to in the previous process (step S904) is compared with “0” to check whether the value of the reserved marker counter is large. As a result of the confirmation, if the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S910. On the other hand, when the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol is not greater than 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the action memory effect management process (FIG. 54).

  Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the holding marker counter of each special symbol is the same. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 compares the values of the holding marker counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol referred to in the previous processing (step S900 and step S904), and whether the values are the same. Confirm whether or not. As a result of the confirmation, if the value of the holding marker counter of each special symbol is the same (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the operation memory effect management process (FIG. 54). On the other hand, when the value of the holding marker counter of each special symbol is not the same (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S912.

  Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 resets the holding marker counter of the second special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130, and the stored value of the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol stored in the first special symbol is referred to in the previous process (step S900). Change to the marker counter value and store.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the working memory effect management process (FIG. 54).

  In this way, the pending marker counter monitoring process (FIG. 55) is executed each time the working memory effect management process (FIG. 54) is executed. And in the holding marker counter monitoring process, when the values of the holding marker counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different, they are reset to the same value, so the holding marker rotation effect of the first special symbol And the marker material number of the marker image displayed in the reserved marker rotation effect of the second special symbol have the same value, and control when managing (setting, updating) the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol and the second special symbol Mistakes can be suppressed. Therefore, synchronized animation control can be further ensured, and visibility and animation expression can be improved.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, only the value of the holding marker counter of each special symbol is monitored. In the fifth embodiment, control for monitoring the value of the special marker holding marker counter and the value of the consumption marker counter is further added, and specific contents will be described.

[Working Memory Production Management Process of Fifth Embodiment]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process according to the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the control content similar to 1st Embodiment or 4th Embodiment.

  Step S450: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. As a result of the confirmation, when the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S452. On the other hand, when the effect command at the time of increase in the number of working memories has not been received (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S454.

  Step S452: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern for displaying a marker image corresponding to the increased total stored number. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S454.

  Step S454: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories is decreased is received from the main control CPU 72. As a result of this confirmation, when the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S456. On the other hand, when the effect command at the time when the number of working memories is decreased is not received (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S457.

  Step S456: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, an effect pattern (marker image shift display pattern) for displaying a marker image corresponding to the total stored number after reduction is selected. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S457.

  Step S457: The effect control CPU 126 executes a consumption marker counter monitoring process. Specifically, when the value of the consumption marker counter is greater than 0, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the reserved marker counter of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is the same. If it is different, reset it. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S458.

  Step S458: The effect control CPU 126 executes a pending marker counter monitoring process. Specifically, when the value of the reserved marker counter of the special symbol is larger than 0, the production control CPU 126 checks whether or not it is the same as the value of the reserved marker counter of another special symbol. Set. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S460.

  Step S460: The effect control CPU 126 executes a pending marker effect setting process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 sets execution of the reserved marker rotation effect. For example, by setting a marker image to be displayed at the time of processing, the marker image of the first special symbol is changed from the white marker MA1 to MA2, thereby realizing an animation in which a coin rotates. Further, when there is an operation memory of the first special symbol and an operation memory of the second special symbol and each marker image is displayed, a process of synchronizing them is also executed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S485.

  Step S485: The effect control CPU 126 executes a consumption marker effect setting process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 sets execution of the consumption marker rotation effect. For example, by setting a marker image to be displayed at the time of processing, the marker image is changed from the marker MH3 to MH4, thereby realizing an animation in which a coin rotates. Moreover, the process which synchronizes the marker image of the operation | movement memory of the special symbol before moving and the marker image of a consumption marker is also performed.

  When the above procedure is executed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 39).

[Consumption marker counter monitoring processing of the fifth embodiment]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of consumption marker counter monitoring processing according to the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S950: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the consumption marker counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the stored value of the consumption marker counter. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S952.

  Step S952: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the consumption marker counter is greater than zero. Specifically, the value of the consumption marker counter referred to in the previous process (step S950) is compared with “0” to check whether the value of the consumption marker counter is large. As a result of this confirmation, if the value of the consumption marker counter is greater than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S954. On the other hand, when the value of the consumption marker counter is not greater than 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the operation memory effect management process (FIG. 56).

  Step S954: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the stored marker counter value corresponding to the first special symbol stored therein. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S956.

  Step S956: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol is greater than zero. Specifically, the value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol referred to in the previous process (step S954) is compared with “0” to check whether the value of the holding marker counter is large. As a result of the confirmation, if the value of the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S960. On the other hand, when the value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol is not greater than 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S957.

  Step S957: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the stored marker counter value corresponding to the stored second special symbol. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S958.

  Step S958: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol is greater than zero. Specifically, the value of the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol referred to in the previous process (step S957) is compared with “0” to check whether the value of the reserved marker counter is large. As a result of the confirmation, if the value of the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S960. On the other hand, when the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol is not greater than 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the action memory effect management process (FIG. 56).

  Step S960: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the value of the consumption marker counter and the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) are the same. Here, the target special symbol is based on whether the previous processing is via step S956 or step S958. For example, if Yes in step S956, the target special symbol represents the first special symbol, and if Yes in step S958, the target special symbol represents the second special symbol.

  The effect control CPU 126 specifically compares the value of the consumption marker counter referenced in the previous process (step S950 and step S954) with the value of the reserved marker counter of the first special symbol in this process, or The value of the consumption marker counter referred to in the processing (step S950 and step S957) is compared with the value of the reserved marker counter of the second special symbol, and it is confirmed whether or not each value is the same. As a result of the confirmation, if the value of the consumption marker counter and the value of the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) are the same (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 performs the operation memory effect management process. Return to FIG. On the other hand, when the value of the consumption marker counter and the value of the reserved marker counter of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) are not the same (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S962.

  Step S962: The effect control CPU 126 resets the holding marker counter of the target special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the counter buffer area of the RAM 130, and changes the stored marker counter value of the target special symbol stored to the consumption marker counter value referenced in the previous process (step S950). Change and memorize. For example, if the target special symbol is the first special symbol, the value of the holding marker counter of the first special symbol is changed to the value of the consumption marker counter and stored, and the target special symbol is the second special symbol. If there is, the value of the holding marker counter of the second special symbol is changed to the value of the consumption marker counter and stored.

  It should be noted that the consumption marker counter and the reserved marker counter of the target special symbol are only synchronized, and are not synchronized with the reserved marker counter of another special symbol, but return to the working memory effect management process (FIG. 56), In the holding marker counter monitoring process to be executed next (FIG. 56: step S458), the holding marker counter of the special symbol different from the target special symbol is synchronized. Specifically, since it has been described in the pending marker counter monitoring process (FIG. 55), description thereof is omitted.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the working memory effect management process (FIG. 56).

  Thus, every time the working memory effect management process (FIG. 56) is executed, the consumption marker counter monitoring process (FIG. 57) and the pending marker counter monitoring process (FIG. 55) are executed. In the consumption marker counter monitoring process, if the value of the consumption marker counter and the value of the holding marker counter of one special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) are different, they are set to the same value. . Then, in the holding marker counter monitoring process to be performed next, if the values of the holding marker counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different, they are reset to the same value. The marker material number of the marker image displayed in the marker rotation effect, the reserved marker rotation effect of the second special symbol, the reserved marker movement effect, and the consumption marker counter rotation process becomes the same value, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol Control mistakes when managing (setting or updating) the symbol holding marker counter and the consumption marker counter can be suppressed. Therefore, synchronized animation control can be further ensured, and visibility and animation expression can be improved.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Moreover, the structure of the pachinko machine 1, a board | substrate surface structure, etc. are a preferable illustration including the thing of illustration, and it cannot be overemphasized that these can be deform | transformed suitably.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 26 Upper start prize port 28 Variable start prize device 28a Lower start prize port 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 First special symbol display device 35 Second special symbol Symbol display device 34a First special symbol operation memory lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display device 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (3)

A first lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a first lottery element necessary for execution of a predetermined internal lottery when a first lottery opportunity occurs during a game;
When a second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity occurs during the game, a second lottery element that is different from the first lottery element and is necessary for the execution of the internal lottery is acquired. Lottery element acquisition means;
First lottery element storage means for storing the first lottery element acquired by the first lottery element acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Second lottery element storage means for storing the second lottery elements acquired by the second lottery element acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
When the first lottery element is stored by the first lottery element storage unit in a state where a predetermined start condition is satisfied, or the second lottery element is stored by the second lottery element storage unit. A lottery execution means for consuming the lottery element of either the first lottery element or the second lottery element and executing the internal lottery,
When the first lottery element is consumed and the internal lottery is executed, the first symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time as a trigger, and then the first symbol is displayed in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery. A first symbol display means for stopping and displaying
When the internal lottery is executed by consuming the second lottery element, the second symbol different from the first symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time as a trigger, and then the result of the internal lottery A second symbol display means for stopping and displaying the second symbol in a manner representing
In parallel with the variation display and stop display executed by the first symbol display means or the variation display and stop display executed by the second symbol display means, the first lottery element storage means performs the first display. First memory number display effect execution means for executing a first memory number display effect in a mode of displaying the memory number of the first lottery element using a first memory display image that individually represents the existence of memory of one lottery element; ,
In parallel with the change display and stop display executed by the first symbol display means or the change display and stop display executed by the second symbol display means, the second lottery element storage means performs the second display. Second memory number display effect execution means for executing a second memory number display effect in a mode of displaying the memory number of the second lottery element using a second memory display image that individually represents the existence of the memory of two lottery elements; ,
When the first lottery element is consumed and the internal lottery is executed, a first consumption effect representing that the first lottery element is consumed is executed for a predetermined time using the first stored display image. When the second lottery element is consumed and the internal lottery is executed, the consumption for executing a second consumption effect indicating that the second lottery element is consumed using the second stored display image for a predetermined time. Production execution means;
For the first memory display image used in the first memory number display effect or the first consumption effect, a plurality of types of the first memory that are changed in stages from a first reference image as a reference to a first final image. First storage display image defining means for predefining a display image;
The second memory display image used in the second memory number display effect or the second consumption effect changes stepwise from a second reference image, which is a reference different from the first reference image, to a second final image. Second storage display image defining means for preliminarily defining the plurality of types of the second storage display images,
During execution of the first memory number display effect by the first memory number display effect executing means, the first memory display image used for the first memory number display effect is used at a predetermined image switching time for the previous time. First storage display image selection means for selecting one of the plurality of types of first storage display images defined by the first storage display image defining means based on the degree of stepwise change of the first storage display image. When,
During execution of the second memory number display effect by the second memory number display effect executing means, the second memory display image used for the second memory number display effect was used last time for each predetermined image switching time. Second storage display image for selecting one of the plurality of types of second storage display images defined by the second storage display image defining means based on the degree of stepwise change in the second storage display image A selection means;
During execution of the first consumption effect by the consumption effect executing means, the first stored display image used for the first consumption effect is changed to the stage of the first storage display image used last time for each predetermined image switching time. On the basis of the degree of change, the first stored display image defined by the first stored display image defining means is selected from one of the plurality of types of the first stored display images, and the second consumed effect is executed by the consumed effect executing means. During execution, the second storage display image used for the second consumption effect is stored in the second storage on the basis of the degree of stepwise change of the second storage display image used last time for each predetermined image switching time. Consumption image selection means for selecting one of the plurality of types of the second storage display images defined by the display image definition means;
Execution of the second memory number display effect is started during execution of the first memory number display effect, or execution of the first memory number display effect is started during execution of the second memory number display effect. Then, for the images selected by the first storage display image selection unit and the second storage display image selection unit at the same time, images having the same degree of change in stages are selected, and the first storage When at least one of the number display effect or the second stored number display effect and the first consumption effect or the second consumption effect are executed in parallel, the first stored display image selection means or the first Image synchronization means for selecting images having the same degree of change in stages for images selected at the same time by at least one of the two stored display image selection means and the consumption image selection means. The gaming machine. A first lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a first lottery element necessary for execution of a predetermined internal lottery when a first lottery opportunity occurs during a game;
When a second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity occurs during the game, a second lottery element that is different from the first lottery element and is necessary for the execution of the internal lottery is acquired. Lottery element acquisition means;
First lottery element storage means for storing the first lottery element acquired by the first lottery element acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Second lottery element storage means for storing the second lottery elements acquired by the second lottery element acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
When the first lottery element is stored by the first lottery element storage unit in a state where a predetermined start condition is satisfied, or the second lottery element is stored by the second lottery element storage unit. A lottery execution means for consuming the lottery element of either the first lottery element or the second lottery element and executing the internal lottery,
When the first lottery element is consumed and the internal lottery is executed, the first symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time as a trigger, and then the first symbol is displayed in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery. A first symbol display means for stopping and displaying
When the internal lottery is executed by consuming the second lottery element, the second symbol different from the first symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time as a trigger, and then the result of the internal lottery A second symbol display means for stopping and displaying the second symbol in a manner representing
In parallel with the variation display and stop display executed by the first symbol display means or the variation display and stop display executed by the second symbol display means, the first lottery element storage means performs the first display. First memory number display effect execution means for executing a first memory number display effect in a mode of displaying the memory number of the first lottery element using a first memory display image that individually represents the existence of memory of one lottery element; ,
In parallel with the change display and stop display executed by the first symbol display means or the change display and stop display executed by the second symbol display means, the second lottery element storage means performs the second display. Second memory number display effect execution means for executing a second memory number display effect in a mode of displaying the memory number of the second lottery element using a second memory display image that individually represents the existence of the memory of two lottery elements; ,
When the first lottery element is consumed and the internal lottery is executed, a first consumption effect representing that the first lottery element is consumed is executed for a predetermined time using the first stored display image. When the second lottery element is consumed and the internal lottery is executed, the consumption for executing a second consumption effect indicating that the second lottery element is consumed using the second stored display image for a predetermined time. Production execution means;
For the first memory display image used in the first memory number display effect or the first consumption effect, a plurality of types of the first memory that are changed in stages from a first reference image as a reference to a first final image. First storage display image defining means for predefining a display image;
The second memory display image used in the second memory number display effect or the second consumption effect changes stepwise from a second reference image, which is a reference different from the first reference image, to a second final image. Second storage display image defining means for preliminarily defining the plurality of types of the second storage display images,
During execution of the first memory number display effect by the first memory number display effect executing means, the first memory display image used for the first memory number display effect is used at a predetermined image switching time for the previous time. First storage display image selection means for selecting one of the plurality of types of first storage display images defined by the first storage display image defining means based on the degree of stepwise change of the first storage display image. When,
During execution of the second memory number display effect by the second memory number display effect executing means, the second memory display image used for the second memory number display effect was used last time for each predetermined image switching time. Second storage display image for selecting one of the plurality of types of second storage display images defined by the second storage display image defining means based on the degree of stepwise change in the second storage display image A selection means;
During execution of the first consumption effect by the consumption effect executing means, the first stored display image used for the first consumption effect is changed to the stage of the first storage display image used last time for each predetermined image switching time. On the basis of the degree of change, the first stored display image defined by the first stored display image defining means is selected from one of the plurality of types of the first stored display images, and the second consumed effect is executed by the consumed effect executing means. During execution, the second storage display image used for the second consumption effect is stored in the second storage on the basis of the degree of stepwise change of the second storage display image used last time for each predetermined image switching time. Consumption image selection means for selecting one of the plurality of types of the second storage display images defined by the display image definition means;
When at least one of the effect and said first consumption effect and the second consumption effect is performed in parallel among the previous SL first storage count display effect or the second storage count display effect, the first storage display image for at least one image of the the consumer image selecting means selects the same time of the selection means or said second storage display image selecting means includes a degree which varies stepwise each and image synchronization means for selecting the same image ,
The image synchronization means includes
When execution of the first memory number display effect by the first memory number display effect executing means is started during execution of the first consumption effect or the second consumption effect by the consumption effect executing means, the consumption image selection Performing control to cause the first storage display image selection means to select an image having the same degree of change as the image selected by the means,
When execution of the second stored number display effect by the second stored number display effect executing means is started during execution of the first consumption effect or the second consumed effect by the consumption effect executing means, the consumption image selection A game machine, characterized in that control is performed to cause the second storage display image selection means to select an image having the same degree of change as the image selected by the means. A first lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a first lottery element necessary for execution of a predetermined internal lottery when a first lottery opportunity occurs during a game;
When a second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity occurs during the game, a second lottery element that is different from the first lottery element and is necessary for the execution of the internal lottery is acquired. Lottery element acquisition means;
First lottery element storage means for storing the first lottery element acquired by the first lottery element acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Second lottery element storage means for storing the second lottery elements acquired by the second lottery element acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
When the first lottery element is stored by the first lottery element storage unit in a state where a predetermined start condition is satisfied, or the second lottery element is stored by the second lottery element storage unit. A lottery execution means for consuming the lottery element of either the first lottery element or the second lottery element and executing the internal lottery,
When the first lottery element is consumed and the internal lottery is executed, the first symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time as a trigger, and then the first symbol is displayed in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery. A first symbol display means for stopping and displaying
When the internal lottery is executed by consuming the second lottery element, the second symbol different from the first symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time as a trigger, and then the result of the internal lottery A second symbol display means for stopping and displaying the second symbol in a manner representing
In parallel with the variation display and stop display executed by the first symbol display means or the variation display and stop display executed by the second symbol display means, the first lottery element storage means performs the first display. First memory number display effect execution means for executing a first memory number display effect in a mode of displaying the memory number of the first lottery element using a first memory display image that individually represents the existence of memory of one lottery element; ,
In parallel with the change display and stop display executed by the first symbol display means or the change display and stop display executed by the second symbol display means, the second lottery element storage means performs the second display. Second memory number display effect execution means for executing a second memory number display effect in a mode of displaying the memory number of the second lottery element using a second memory display image that individually represents the existence of the memory of two lottery elements; ,
When the first lottery element is consumed and the internal lottery is executed, a first consumption effect representing that the first lottery element is consumed is executed for a predetermined time using the first stored display image. When the second lottery element is consumed and the internal lottery is executed, the consumption for executing a second consumption effect indicating that the second lottery element is consumed using the second stored display image for a predetermined time. Production execution means;
For the first memory display image used in the first memory number display effect or the first consumption effect, a plurality of types of the first memory that are changed in stages from a first reference image as a reference to a first final image. First storage display image defining means for predefining a display image;
The second memory display image used in the second memory number display effect or the second consumption effect changes stepwise from a second reference image, which is a reference different from the first reference image, to a second final image. Second storage display image defining means for preliminarily defining the plurality of types of the second storage display images,
During execution of the first memory number display effect by the first memory number display effect executing means, the first memory display image used for the first memory number display effect is used at a predetermined image switching time for the previous time. First storage display image selection means for selecting one of the plurality of types of first storage display images defined by the first storage display image defining means based on the degree of stepwise change of the first storage display image. When,
During execution of the second memory number display effect by the second memory number display effect executing means, the second memory display image used for the second memory number display effect was used last time for each predetermined image switching time. Second storage display image for selecting one of the plurality of types of second storage display images defined by the second storage display image defining means based on the degree of stepwise change in the second storage display image A selection means;
During execution of the first consumption effect by the consumption effect executing means, the first stored display image used for the first consumption effect is changed to the stage of the first storage display image used last time for each predetermined image switching time. On the basis of the degree of change, the first stored display image defined by the first stored display image defining means is selected from one of the plurality of types of the first stored display images, and the second consumed effect is executed by the consumed effect executing means. During execution, the second storage display image used for the second consumption effect is stored in the second storage on the basis of the degree of stepwise change of the second storage display image used last time for each predetermined image switching time. Consumption image selection means for selecting one of the plurality of types of the second storage display images defined by the display image definition means;
When the first stored number display effect and the second stored number display effect are executed in parallel, the images selected by the first stored display image selecting unit and the second stored display image selecting unit at the same time For each of the images, the images having the same degree of change in stages are selected, and at least one of the first stored number display effect or the second stored number display effect and the first consumption effect or the second consumption effect. Are executed in parallel, at least one of the first storage display image selection means or the second storage display image selection means and the consumption image selection means select images at the same time in stages. Image synchronization means for selecting images having the same degree of change ,
The first storage display image selection means includes:
In the state where the first memory number display effect by the first memory number display effect execution means and the second memory number display effect execution means by the second memory number display effect execution means are not executed, the first memory number When execution of the first memorized number display effect is started by the display effect executing means, the first reference image is selected,
The second storage display image selection means includes:
In the state where the first memory number display effect by the first memory number display effect executing means and the second memory number display effect by the second memory number display effect executing means are not executed, the second memory number A gaming machine, wherein the second reference image is selected when execution of the second stored number display effect is started by the display effect executing means.